2003-12-03 08:26:43 +05:30
|
|
|
<!--
|
|
|
|
|
User Manual for Gramps - a GTK+/GNOME based genealogy program
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-15 08:05:26 +05:30
|
|
|
Copyright (C) 2003-2005 Alexander Roitman
|
2003-12-03 08:26:43 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-02-15 08:05:26 +05:30
|
|
|
This document is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
|
|
|
|
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
|
|
|
|
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
|
|
|
|
|
(at your option) any later version.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
|
|
|
|
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
|
|
|
|
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
|
|
|
|
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
|
|
|
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
|
|
|
|
|
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
|
2003-12-03 08:26:43 +05:30
|
|
|
-->
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- $Id$ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-usage">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Usage</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As commonly encountered in everyday life, there is usually more
|
|
|
|
|
than one way to accomplish something in &app;. The alternatives to
|
|
|
|
|
some actions will therefore be listed as appropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="new-db">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Starting a New Database</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To start a new database, choose
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will then be prompted with the <guilabel>Create GRAMPS
|
|
|
|
|
database</guilabel> dialog asking to specify the name under
|
|
|
|
|
which the new database will be stored. The new database will be
|
|
|
|
|
created in the BSDDB format, with <filename>.grdb</filename> as
|
|
|
|
|
the default extension.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note id="new-db-notdir-note">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Selecting file</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This version does not require selecting a directory for the
|
|
|
|
|
database. Please select filename, as you would in any other
|
|
|
|
|
application.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="open-db">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Opening a Database</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To open a database, either choose
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
or click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button on the Toolbar.
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Open database</guilabel> dialog will appear.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The filetype filter in the <guilabel>Open database</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
dialog allows you to display files of a certain type. If the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>All files</guilabel> filter is selected (the default),
|
|
|
|
|
all the files will be shown. The type will be determined by the
|
|
|
|
|
extension of the selected filename.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note id="open-db-note">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Selecting file</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unlike the version 1.0.X of &app;, this version does not
|
|
|
|
|
require selecting directory for the database. Please select
|
|
|
|
|
filename, as you would in any other application.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you do not have write permissions for the selected database,
|
|
|
|
|
it will be opened in a Read Only mode. In this mode, the data
|
|
|
|
|
may be viewed, but no changes will be made to the database. To
|
|
|
|
|
indicate this mode, the title of the main window will be
|
|
|
|
|
appended with <guilabel>(Read Only)</guilabel> text.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note id="open-db-note2">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Opening XML and GEDCOM databases</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This version allows direct opening and editing of &app; XML
|
|
|
|
|
and GEDCOM databases. Please keep in mind that, unlike using
|
|
|
|
|
the native grdb format, these formats require holding all data
|
|
|
|
|
in memory. This leads to performance and memory consumption
|
|
|
|
|
problems which grdb was designed to solve.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
While direct opening of a &app; XML or GEDCOM file is
|
|
|
|
|
convenient for a small database, it may prove burdensome for
|
|
|
|
|
large databases. If you experience this, please consider
|
|
|
|
|
creating a new native (grdb) database and importing your XML
|
|
|
|
|
or GEDCOM data into it. This will make accessing your data
|
|
|
|
|
much more efficient and quick.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<warning id="open-db-warn">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>GEDCOM Editing</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please keep in mind that some information in a GEDCOM file may
|
|
|
|
|
be lost during import into &app;. Simply opening and viewing
|
|
|
|
|
the file will not change it. However, if any changes were
|
|
|
|
|
made and they were not abandoned upon exit, exiting &app; will
|
|
|
|
|
save the data, with possible data loss.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To open a recently opened database, choose
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Open Recent</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
and select the filename from the list. You can also use
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Actions</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Recent Documents</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
from the GNOME <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> menu.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="save-db">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Saving a Database</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A consequence of the new database backend is that the changes,
|
|
|
|
|
once approved by the user, are applied immediately. Once you
|
|
|
|
|
click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the Person, Family, Source,
|
|
|
|
|
Place, Media object, or Event editor, all the changes made to
|
|
|
|
|
this object are recorded in the database. No saving is
|
|
|
|
|
necessary, or even possible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Choosing
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
allows you to undo the changes you made, one step at a time.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tip id="save-tip">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Reverting the whole session</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you would like to revert the whole editing session, choose
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Abandon
|
|
|
|
|
changes and quit</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will be
|
|
|
|
|
analogous to quitting without saving any changes in other
|
|
|
|
|
applications.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you would like to save your database under a different name,
|
|
|
|
|
you can do so by choosing
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Save as...</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
and specifying the name (and, optionally, format) of your new
|
|
|
|
|
database.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note id="save-as-note">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>"Save as" continues editing</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If you use the <guilabel>Save as...</guilabel> function, the
|
|
|
|
|
editing in the main window is performed on the newly made
|
|
|
|
|
copy. If this is not what you want to do, please consider
|
|
|
|
|
using <guilabel>Export...</guilabel> instead.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="import-data">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Importing Data</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Importing allows you to incorporate the data from other
|
|
|
|
|
databases into your currently open &app; database. Currently,
|
|
|
|
|
&app; can import data from the following formats: &app; database
|
|
|
|
|
(grdb), GEDCOM, &app; XML, &app; package, and GeneWeb. All of
|
|
|
|
|
these are available by choosing
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
and selecting an appropriate file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
&app; database (grdb), &app; XML, and &app; package are all
|
|
|
|
|
native &app; formats in that there is no information loss
|
|
|
|
|
resulting from reading from and writing into these formats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>&app; database (grdb)</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The native &app; database format is a specific form of
|
|
|
|
|
Berkeley database (BSDDB) with special structure of data
|
|
|
|
|
tables. This format is binary and
|
|
|
|
|
architecture-dependent. It is very quick and efficient,
|
|
|
|
|
but not generally portable across computers with
|
|
|
|
|
different binary architecture (e.g. i386 vs alpha).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>&app; XML</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The &app; XML file was the default format for the
|
|
|
|
|
previous stable version of &app;. Unlike the grdb
|
|
|
|
|
format, it is architecture independent and
|
|
|
|
|
human-readable. The database may also have references to
|
|
|
|
|
non-local (external) media objects, therefore it is not
|
|
|
|
|
guaranteed to be completely portable. The &app; XML
|
|
|
|
|
database is created by saving (
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
) or exporting (
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
) data in that format
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>&app; package</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The package is a compressed archive containing the &app;
|
|
|
|
|
XML file and all media objects (images, sound files,
|
|
|
|
|
etc.) to which the database refers. The &app; package is
|
|
|
|
|
created by exporting (
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
) data in that format.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tip id="import-tip">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Opening vs importing</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The difference between opening &app; database (in any format)
|
|
|
|
|
and importing from &app; or GEDCOM database is that importing
|
|
|
|
|
incorporates all the data into your currently open database,
|
|
|
|
|
if any. In contrast, opening the database will switch from
|
|
|
|
|
editing your current data to editing another file.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
After choosing an import format, you will be prompted with the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Import database</guilabel> dialog asking you to
|
|
|
|
|
specify the file name from which to import.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<note id="import-note">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Selecting file</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
This version does not require selecting a directory for the
|
|
|
|
|
database. Please select filename, as you would in any other
|
|
|
|
|
application.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Upon starting the GEDCOM import, &app; will display the
|
|
|
|
|
following GEDCOM import dialog with the summary of the
|
|
|
|
|
information about the data. The information is updated as the
|
|
|
|
|
import progresses.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: GEDCOM Import ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="gedcom-import-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>GEDCOM Import</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/gedcom-import.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="510" depth="490" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows GEDCOM Import Window.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Upon starting the &app; database or &app; package import, &app;
|
|
|
|
|
will display the progress in the progress bar of its main window.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If a media file is not found during import, the following dialog
|
|
|
|
|
will prompt you for the possible actions:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Missing media window ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="missing-media-im">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Missing Media dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/missing-media.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="493" depth="264"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Missing Media dialog.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To remove the object corresponding to the missing file as
|
|
|
|
|
well as all the references to that object from various
|
|
|
|
|
database records, click the <guibutton>Remove
|
|
|
|
|
Object</guibutton> button. This will alter your database so
|
|
|
|
|
that it will be in a consistent state, but all the
|
|
|
|
|
references to the missing file will be gone. Use this option
|
|
|
|
|
if the file is irrevocably lost and there is no possibility
|
|
|
|
|
of ever replacing it.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To keep the reference to the object corresponding to the
|
|
|
|
|
missing file, click the <guibutton>Keep
|
|
|
|
|
Reference</guibutton> button. This will leave things as is,
|
|
|
|
|
i.e. in an inconsistent state. You could supply the missing
|
|
|
|
|
file later, in which case you will have to copy it into your
|
|
|
|
|
database directory. Choose this option if the replacement is
|
|
|
|
|
possible, but not available right now.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To supply the missing file during import, click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Select File</guibutton> button. This will copy
|
|
|
|
|
the file you select in place of the missing file. No
|
|
|
|
|
references will be altered in the database, and it will be
|
|
|
|
|
in the consistent state. Use this option if the replacement
|
|
|
|
|
is readily available.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To automatically use the selection made in this dialog for
|
|
|
|
|
all missing media files, check the <guilabel>Use this
|
|
|
|
|
selection for all missing media files</guilabel> box. This
|
|
|
|
|
will remember your choice and use it for all media files
|
|
|
|
|
missing during this import, so that no further dialogs will
|
|
|
|
|
be presented. Use this option if you anticipate many missing
|
|
|
|
|
files and want to deal with all of them in the same manner.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="export-data">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Exporting Data</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting allows you to share any portion of your &app; database
|
|
|
|
|
with other researchers as well as to make your database
|
|
|
|
|
completely portable to another computer. Currently, &app; can
|
|
|
|
|
export data to the following formats: &app; database (grdb),
|
|
|
|
|
&app; XML, GEDCOM, &app; package, Web Family Tree, and GeneWeb.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note id="export-note">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Export is saving a copy</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting will create another file with the copy of your data.
|
|
|
|
|
The database currently opened in your &app; window is NOT the
|
|
|
|
|
file saved by your export. Future editing of the currently
|
|
|
|
|
opened database will not alter the copy produced by the
|
|
|
|
|
export.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To export data, choose
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
|
This will bring up the <guilabel>Export</guilabel> druid. Its
|
|
|
|
|
pages will guide you through the format selection (see <xref
|
|
|
|
|
linkend="export-druid-fig"/>), file selection, and format
|
|
|
|
|
specific export options (see <xref
|
|
|
|
|
linkend="gedcom-export-fig"/>). After a final confirmation
|
|
|
|
|
page, the export will be performed according to the choices you
|
|
|
|
|
have made. At any time, you can click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Back</guibutton> and revise any selection, and then
|
|
|
|
|
go forward to redo the export.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: GEDCOM Export ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="export-druid-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Export druid: format selection</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/export-druid.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="383" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows format selection page of an Export druid</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-gedcom">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>GEDCOM export</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
GEDCOM export options allow you to fine tune your export (see
|
|
|
|
|
<xref linkend="gedcom-export-fig"/>). Choose the desired
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Encoding</guilabel> of the exported file. Use the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Filter</guilabel> pop-up menu to limit the scope of
|
|
|
|
|
the export according to the stated rule. Use the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Target</guilabel> menu to select the desired GEDCOM
|
|
|
|
|
dialect. Select your copyright statement from the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Copyright</guilabel> menu. Check <guilabel>Do not
|
|
|
|
|
include records marked private</guilabel> to disable the
|
|
|
|
|
output of private records. Check <guilabel>Restrict data on
|
|
|
|
|
living people</guilabel> to limit living people's data to
|
|
|
|
|
family ties. With this option, information concerning birth,
|
|
|
|
|
death, addresses, various events, etc. will be omitted in the
|
|
|
|
|
exported GEDCOM file. If this option is selected, you can
|
|
|
|
|
further choose whether to use the word "Living" as first name,
|
|
|
|
|
exclude notes, and exclude sources for the living
|
|
|
|
|
people. Check <guilabel>Reference images from path</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
to tell &app; to use the specific path for your images when
|
|
|
|
|
writing image references in GEDCOM.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: GEDCOM Export ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="gedcom-export-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Export druid: GEDCOM options</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/gedcom-export.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="481" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows GEDCOM options page of an Export druid</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Export ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-gramps-formats">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Export into &app; formats</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>&app; database (grdb) export</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting to the native format will simply make a copy
|
|
|
|
|
of your data under another name. It also may be useful
|
|
|
|
|
if you have directly opened XML or GEDCOM file and
|
|
|
|
|
would like to save it as the grdb file.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>&app; XML database export</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting into &app; XML format will produce a database
|
|
|
|
|
compatible with the previous versions of &app;. As XML
|
|
|
|
|
is a text-based human-readable format, you may also use
|
|
|
|
|
it to take a look at your data.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>&app; package export</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting to &app; package will create a gzip-compressed
|
|
|
|
|
tar archive (also known as tarball) which contains
|
|
|
|
|
gramps database and copies of all media objects
|
|
|
|
|
files. This is a useful format for moving your database
|
|
|
|
|
to another machine or for sharing it with somebody,
|
|
|
|
|
while retaining all the features provided by &app; .
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Export to CD</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting to CD will prepare your database and copies of
|
|
|
|
|
all media objects files to be recorded to the CD. This
|
|
|
|
|
is done through the <guilabel>burn:///</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
location in Nautilus. After exporting to CD, go to the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>burn:///</guilabel> location by selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>CD Creator</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
in Nautilus menu (unless this location is already
|
|
|
|
|
displayed by &app;). Your database directory will show
|
|
|
|
|
up. To record it on to the CD, click the CD icon on the
|
|
|
|
|
Nautilus toolbar, or select
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Write to CD</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
in Nautilus menu.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If a media file is not found during export, the following
|
|
|
|
|
dialog will prompt you for the possible actions:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Missing media window ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="missing-media-ex">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Missing Media dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/missing-media.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="434" depth="264" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Missing Media dialog.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To remove the object corresponding to the missing file
|
|
|
|
|
as well as all the references to that object from
|
|
|
|
|
various database records, click the <guibutton>Remove
|
|
|
|
|
Object</guibutton> button. This will alter your database
|
|
|
|
|
so that it will be in the consistent state, but all the
|
|
|
|
|
references to the missing file will be gone. Use this
|
|
|
|
|
option if the file is irrevocably lost and there is no
|
|
|
|
|
possibility of ever replacing it.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To keep the reference to the object corresponding to the
|
|
|
|
|
missing file, click the <guibutton>Keep
|
|
|
|
|
Reference</guibutton> button. This will leave things as
|
|
|
|
|
is, i.e. in the inconsistent state. You could supply
|
|
|
|
|
the missing file later, in which case you will have to
|
|
|
|
|
copy it into your database directory. Choose this option
|
|
|
|
|
if the replacement is possible, but not available right
|
|
|
|
|
now.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To supply the missing file during export, click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Select File</guibutton> button. This will
|
|
|
|
|
copy the file you select in place of the missing
|
|
|
|
|
file. No references will be altered in the database, and
|
|
|
|
|
it will be in the consistent state. Use this option if
|
|
|
|
|
the replacement is readily available.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To automatically use the selection made in this dialog
|
|
|
|
|
for all missing media files, check the <guilabel>Use
|
|
|
|
|
this selection for all missing media files</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
box. This will remember your choice and use it for all
|
|
|
|
|
media files missing during this export, so that no
|
|
|
|
|
further dialogs will be presented. Use this option if
|
|
|
|
|
you anticipate many missing files and want to deal with
|
|
|
|
|
all of them in the same manner.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-other-formats">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Export into other formats</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Web Family Tree</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting to Web Family Tree will create the text file
|
|
|
|
|
suitable as an input for the WFT program. Specific
|
|
|
|
|
options include filter selection and the ability to
|
|
|
|
|
restrict data on living people, that is to limit living
|
|
|
|
|
people's data to family ties.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>GeneWeb</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting to GeneWeb will save a copy of your data into
|
|
|
|
|
a popular web genealogy format. To find out more about
|
|
|
|
|
GeneWeb and its format, visit
|
|
|
|
|
<ulink url="http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/"
|
|
|
|
|
type="http">this site.</ulink>
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>vCalendar and vCard</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Exporting to vCalendar or vCard will save information in
|
|
|
|
|
a format used in many calendaring and addressbook
|
|
|
|
|
applications, sometimes called PIM for Personal
|
|
|
|
|
Information Manager.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-edit-quick">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Editing Data: Quick Start</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Editing any portion of data allows you to amend and/or modify
|
|
|
|
|
information stored in the database. The available editing
|
|
|
|
|
options include editing personal data, relationship data, data
|
|
|
|
|
about children and parents, and information about sources,
|
|
|
|
|
places, and media objects used in the database. In short, any
|
|
|
|
|
data stored in the database can be edited! Adding a new piece
|
|
|
|
|
of information is the process of creating an appropriate empty
|
|
|
|
|
data structure and subsequently editing that empty structure.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
This section refers mainly to the menu items and buttons as
|
|
|
|
|
the main way of interacting with &app;. In addition to this,
|
|
|
|
|
&app; provides an extensive set of key bindings. The detailed
|
|
|
|
|
reference to the key bindings is found in the
|
|
|
|
|
<xref linkend="append-keybind"/>.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-add-pers">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>To Add a Person</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To add a person to the database, switch to the People View
|
|
|
|
|
(<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig"/>) and then click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> on the toolbar. Enter any data you
|
|
|
|
|
know about this person into the <guilabel>Edit
|
|
|
|
|
Person</guilabel> Dialog (see <xref linkend="edit-pers-fig"/>
|
|
|
|
|
for details). To edit information about a person already
|
|
|
|
|
present in the database, select an entry you would like to
|
|
|
|
|
view/modify, and then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
icon on the toolbar.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
You can also use <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> menu items available under the
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>. Or you can right-click on the
|
|
|
|
|
person and select <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> or
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> from the invoked context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-rel">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>To Specify a Relationship</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To specify a relationship, first switch to the Family View
|
|
|
|
|
(<xref linkend="family-fig"/>). Then click one of the two top
|
|
|
|
|
buttons on the right of the spouse box. The topmost button
|
|
|
|
|
adds a new person to the database and to the relationship,
|
|
|
|
|
while the second top button adds a person that is already in a
|
|
|
|
|
database to the relationship.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If using the second button, select the spouse/partner from the
|
|
|
|
|
list and specify the relationship using the menu at the
|
|
|
|
|
bottom. If necessary, you can add a person to the list by
|
|
|
|
|
clicking the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button. &app; will
|
|
|
|
|
filter the displayed list of people based on the apparent
|
|
|
|
|
relationship possibility. Specifically, shown are the people who
|
|
|
|
|
could possibly be in relationship with the active person, as
|
|
|
|
|
judged by the available birth and death information. To
|
|
|
|
|
override this and display all people from the database, check
|
|
|
|
|
the <guilabel>Show all</guilabel> box.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To edit information about a relationship already present in
|
|
|
|
|
the database, move the mouse over the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Spouse</guilabel> box and double-click. If the
|
|
|
|
|
relationship lists has more than one person, you can specify
|
|
|
|
|
the preferred spouse/partner by selecting an appropriate item
|
|
|
|
|
from the context menu available upon right-clicking into the
|
|
|
|
|
spouse box. Also, most of the above function are available
|
|
|
|
|
from the items of this context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-par">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>To Specify Parents</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To specify parents of an active person, first switch to the
|
|
|
|
|
Family View (<xref linkend="family-fig"/>). Then click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button on the right of the active
|
|
|
|
|
person's parents list box. Select the parents from two lists
|
|
|
|
|
and specify the parents' relationships to the active person
|
|
|
|
|
using menus at the bottom. You can also specify parents'
|
|
|
|
|
relationship to each other. If necessary, you can add a
|
|
|
|
|
person to the list by clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The top and bottom lists contain males and females,
|
|
|
|
|
respectively. By default, &app; will limit both lists to
|
|
|
|
|
people who could possibly be the parents (judged by the date
|
|
|
|
|
of birth) of the active person. To override this, check the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Show all</guilabel> box for each list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To specify parents of the active person's spouse, switch to
|
|
|
|
|
the Family View and then click the <guibutton>+</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
button on the right of the spouse's parents list box. To edit
|
|
|
|
|
information about parents already present in the database,
|
|
|
|
|
move the mouse over the corresponding parents' box and
|
|
|
|
|
double-click. All these functions can also be performed by
|
|
|
|
|
right-clicking on the parents' box and selecting an
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-ch">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>To Specify Children</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To specify children of an active person, switch to the Family
|
|
|
|
|
View (<xref linkend="family-fig"/>) and then click either the
|
|
|
|
|
second or the third button from the top on the right of the
|
|
|
|
|
children list box. The second button adds a child to the
|
|
|
|
|
database and to the family, while the third button adds a
|
|
|
|
|
child already present in the database to the family.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If using the third button, select a child from the list and
|
|
|
|
|
specify the child's relationship with father and mother using
|
|
|
|
|
menus at the bottom. If necessary, you can add a person to the
|
|
|
|
|
list by clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button. By
|
|
|
|
|
default, &app; will limit the lists to people who could
|
|
|
|
|
possibly be the child (judged by the date of birth) of the
|
|
|
|
|
active person. To override this, check the <guilabel>Show
|
|
|
|
|
all</guilabel> box.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The relationship of the child to the parents can be modified
|
|
|
|
|
by selecting an appropriate item from the context menu
|
|
|
|
|
available upon right-clicking into the children box. Also,
|
|
|
|
|
most of the above function are available from the items of
|
|
|
|
|
this context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-add-img">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>To Add Images</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
You can add images (as well as other media objects) to
|
|
|
|
|
individual people, events, sources, places, as well as images
|
|
|
|
|
generally related to the database (e.g. group family photos).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To add images related to a single person, switch to the People
|
|
|
|
|
View (<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig"/>), select a person, and
|
|
|
|
|
then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar
|
|
|
|
|
to invoke the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> Dialog
|
|
|
|
|
(<xref linkend="edit-pers-fig"/>). Then, select the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab, and click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button to invoke the <guilabel>Select
|
|
|
|
|
a media object</guilabel> dialog. Type the filename or select
|
|
|
|
|
a file with the image, then provide a title for that
|
|
|
|
|
image. Keep adding images until you are done.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To add images related to a relationship (e.g. marriage),
|
|
|
|
|
switch to the Family View (<xref linkend="family-fig"/>) and
|
|
|
|
|
then double-click on the Spouse box invoke the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Marriage/Relationship editor</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
dialog. Select the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click
|
|
|
|
|
the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To add images related to a source or a place, first switch to
|
|
|
|
|
the Sources View (<xref linkend="sources-fig"/>) or Places
|
|
|
|
|
View (<xref linkend="places-fig"/>), respectively. Then select
|
|
|
|
|
the appropriate source or place and then either double-click
|
|
|
|
|
on it or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar to invoke the <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> (or
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>) dialog. Select the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Finally, to add images that are generally related to the
|
|
|
|
|
database but not limited to any person, relationship, source,
|
|
|
|
|
or place in particular, switch to the Media View (<xref
|
|
|
|
|
linkend="media-fig"/>). Then click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add an
|
|
|
|
|
image. If you have already added any images to any individual
|
|
|
|
|
galleries, you will also find them listed in the Media View.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
In any gallery, you can also use the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons to edit image information and to remove the image
|
|
|
|
|
reference from that gallery. Note that in all galleries
|
|
|
|
|
removing the reference to the image does not remove the image
|
|
|
|
|
from the database. To completely remove the image from the
|
|
|
|
|
database, delete it from Media View by first selecting it and
|
|
|
|
|
then clicking the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-edit-src-plc">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>To Edit Sources and Places</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To add a source or a place to the database, switch to the
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate Sources View (<xref linkend="sources-fig"/>) or
|
|
|
|
|
Places View (<xref linkend="places-fig"/>). Then click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add a
|
|
|
|
|
source/place. Enter the information into the <guilabel>Source
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> (or <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>)
|
|
|
|
|
dialog.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To edit information about sources and places already present
|
|
|
|
|
in the database, switch to the appropriate view, select an
|
|
|
|
|
entry you would like to view/modify, and then click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar. Alternatively, you may double-click on the entry to
|
|
|
|
|
edit it.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-edit-complete">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Editing Data: Complete Description</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
This section provides a complete description of all editing
|
|
|
|
|
options for all pieces of data in the &app; database. It refers
|
|
|
|
|
mainly to the menu items and buttons as the main way of
|
|
|
|
|
interacting with &app;. In addition to this, &app; provides an
|
|
|
|
|
extensive set of keybindings. The detailed reference to the
|
|
|
|
|
keybindings is found in the <xref linkend="append-keybind"/>.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note id="edit-button-note">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Add, Remove, and Edit buttons</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
In order to save precious screen space, most of the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton>, <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> buttons no longer are labeled
|
|
|
|
|
with text. Instead, the first two use
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> icons,
|
|
|
|
|
and the third uses the icon depicting a pen on top of a paper
|
|
|
|
|
sheet.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Reference the latter as the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button, while using
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> to
|
|
|
|
|
denote the former two buttons.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-pers">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Personal Information</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Editing of personal data can be performed in the following
|
|
|
|
|
ways:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>From the People View:</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Double-click the name of the person whose data you would
|
|
|
|
|
like to edit, or select the name by single click and
|
|
|
|
|
then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar. You may also select the name and then press
|
|
|
|
|
<keycap>Enter</keycap>. Finally, you may select
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Edit...</guimenuitem> from the
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Edit</guisubmenu> menu of &app; or choose
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem> from the context menu
|
|
|
|
|
that appears upon right-click on the name.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>From the Family View:</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To edit active person's data, move the mouse into the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Active person</guilabel> box, then
|
|
|
|
|
double-click, or use any of the menu items described
|
|
|
|
|
above. To edit Spouse's data, Shift-click desired
|
|
|
|
|
spouse entry. Also, from <guilabel>Spouse</guilabel> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Children</guilabel> boxes you may select the
|
|
|
|
|
desired person, right-click, and then select the menu
|
|
|
|
|
item from the context menu to edit the selected person's
|
|
|
|
|
data.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>From the Pedigree View:</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Move the mouse into the box bearing the name of the
|
|
|
|
|
person whose data you would like to edit, then
|
|
|
|
|
double-click.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
With either method, the following <guilabel>Edit
|
|
|
|
|
Person</guilabel> dialog will appear:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="413" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the name of the person whose
|
|
|
|
|
data is being edited. The main part of the window displays
|
|
|
|
|
ten notebook tabs containing different categories of
|
|
|
|
|
available information. You can bring any tab to the top for
|
|
|
|
|
viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate tab
|
|
|
|
|
heading. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all
|
|
|
|
|
the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
|
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at
|
|
|
|
|
any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
|
|
|
changes. If any of the data in any tab were modified, the
|
|
|
|
|
alert window will appear with the choices of closing the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog without saving changes, canceling the initial cancel
|
|
|
|
|
request, or saving the changes.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
|
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). This version of
|
|
|
|
|
&app; does not have a separate saving function, all
|
|
|
|
|
changes are immediate.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears boldface; if the tab has no data then its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
|
|
|
personal data:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
general information about the person. This includes
|
|
|
|
|
the text entry fields of <guilabel>Given
|
|
|
|
|
name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family name</guilabel>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Family prefix</guilabel> (such as de or
|
|
|
|
|
van), <guilabel>Suffix</guilabel> (e.g. Jr. or III),
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel> (e.g. Dr. or Rev.),
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Nickname</guilabel> (Bob for Robert),
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel> of the name (birth name,
|
|
|
|
|
married name, etc.) and <guilabel>Date</guilabel> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Place</guilabel> of birth and death. Some of
|
|
|
|
|
these (<guilabel>Family name</guilabel>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, and both
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Place</guilabel> fields), also provide
|
|
|
|
|
autocompletion feature: as you type in these fields,
|
|
|
|
|
the menu is displayed below the field with the
|
|
|
|
|
available entries from the database that are
|
|
|
|
|
compatible with your partial input. This allows for a
|
|
|
|
|
quick selection of an available entry by selecting it
|
|
|
|
|
from the menu, either using the mouse or arrows and
|
|
|
|
|
<keycap>Enter</keycap> key.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> button located by the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Family name</guilabel> entry allows editing
|
|
|
|
|
the preferred name in complete detail, by invoking
|
|
|
|
|
the <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog (see
|
|
|
|
|
<xref linkend="adv-an"/>).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gender</guilabel> radio buttons offer the
|
|
|
|
|
choice of person's gender between
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>male</guilabel>, <guilabel>female</guilabel>,
|
|
|
|
|
and <guilabel>unknown</guilabel>. Clicking the colored
|
|
|
|
|
circle buttons (green, yellow, or red, also called LED
|
|
|
|
|
buttons) located next to the birth and death Date fields
|
|
|
|
|
will bring up the <guilabel>Date Selection</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
dialog allowing detailed modification of the date, see
|
|
|
|
|
<xref linkend="adv-dates"/>. Clicking either
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button located next to the
|
|
|
|
|
birth and death LED buttons will bring up a dialog
|
|
|
|
|
allowing you to edit the corresponding event (birth or
|
|
|
|
|
death) details, see <xref linkend="adv-ev"/>. The field
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel> displays an internal &app; ID
|
|
|
|
|
number which identifies the user in the database. The
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Image</guilabel> area shows the first image
|
|
|
|
|
available in the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> of this
|
|
|
|
|
person (if any exist).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Finally, the <guilabel>Information is
|
|
|
|
|
complete</guilabel> and <guilabel>Information is
|
|
|
|
|
private</guilabel> check buttons provides the way to
|
|
|
|
|
mark whether this person's record is complete or not and
|
|
|
|
|
whether it is a private record.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Names</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Names ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-names-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Names</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-names.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="252" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Names Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Names</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
concerning alternate names of the person and the
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing their modification. The bottom part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all alternate names of the person
|
|
|
|
|
stored in the database. The top part shows the details
|
|
|
|
|
of the currently selected name in the list (if any). The
|
|
|
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow the addition,
|
|
|
|
|
modification, and removal of an alternate name record
|
|
|
|
|
from the database. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when an alternate name is
|
|
|
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Events</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Events ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-events-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Events</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-events.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="278" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Events Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
about the events relevant to the person and controls
|
|
|
|
|
allowing its modification. The bottom part displays the
|
|
|
|
|
list of all such events stored in the database. The top
|
|
|
|
|
part shows the details of the currently selected event
|
|
|
|
|
in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to
|
|
|
|
|
correspondingly add, modify, and remove an event record
|
|
|
|
|
from the database. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when an event is selected
|
|
|
|
|
from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Attributes</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Attributes ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-attributes-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Attributes</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-attributes.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="231"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Attributes Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about the attributes of the person and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing their modification. These could be any
|
|
|
|
|
personal attributes of a person whose description
|
|
|
|
|
naturally fits into Parameter-Value pairs (e.g. enormous
|
|
|
|
|
generosity can be stored as the parameter "Generosity"
|
|
|
|
|
with the value "Enormous", etc.). The bottom part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all attributes stored in the
|
|
|
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the
|
|
|
|
|
currently selected attribute in the list (if any). The
|
|
|
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove an attribute record from the
|
|
|
|
|
database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when an attribute is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Addresses</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Addresses ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-addresses-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Addresses</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-addresses.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="272"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Addresses Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Addresses</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about the addresses of the person and the
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing their modification. The bottom part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all addresses stored in the
|
|
|
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the
|
|
|
|
|
currently selected address in the list (if any). The
|
|
|
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove an address record from the
|
|
|
|
|
database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when an address is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Some reports allow you to restrict data on living
|
|
|
|
|
people. In particular, that option will omit the
|
|
|
|
|
addresses of people who are currently alive.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Notes</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Notes ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-notes-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Notes</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-notes.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="228"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Notes Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
about the notes concerning the person. These could be
|
|
|
|
|
any notes which do not naturally fit into the
|
|
|
|
|
Parameter-Value pairs available to Attributes. To add
|
|
|
|
|
a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in
|
|
|
|
|
the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Sources ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-sources-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Sources</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-sources.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="147"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Sources Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about the sources related to the person and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. These could be any
|
|
|
|
|
general sources which refer to the person but do not
|
|
|
|
|
describe specifically any event. For example, Aunt
|
|
|
|
|
Martha's memoirs may mention her great grandson Paul, so
|
|
|
|
|
the researcher may assume that this person (Paul)
|
|
|
|
|
existed and cite the memoirs as the source for this
|
|
|
|
|
assumption.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Sources documenting specific events are better
|
|
|
|
|
recorded in relation to those events, under the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab. The person's
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab is best used for
|
|
|
|
|
general source references.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The central part displays the list of all source
|
|
|
|
|
references stored in the database in relation to the
|
|
|
|
|
person. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
person. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Gallery ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-gallery-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Gallery</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-gallery.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="182"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75" />
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Gallery Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about media objects associated with the
|
|
|
|
|
person and controls allowing subsequent
|
|
|
|
|
modification. The central part shows the list of all
|
|
|
|
|
such media objects. For media object which are valid
|
|
|
|
|
image files, previews of images are displayed. For other
|
|
|
|
|
objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., a
|
|
|
|
|
corresponding file type icon is displayed instead.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The first available image in the gallery will be also
|
|
|
|
|
displayed in the <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area in
|
|
|
|
|
the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add a new image, add a reference to an image already
|
|
|
|
|
stored in the database, modify, and remove a media
|
|
|
|
|
object reference to this person. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when a media object is
|
|
|
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Removing a media object from a person's gallery does
|
|
|
|
|
not remove it from the database. It only removes the
|
|
|
|
|
reference to that object from this person's record.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Internet</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Internet ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-internet-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Internet</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-internet.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="218"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Internet Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about Internet addresses relevant to the
|
|
|
|
|
person and the controls allowing data modification. The
|
|
|
|
|
bottom part displays the list of all such Internet
|
|
|
|
|
addresses stored in the database. The top part shows the
|
|
|
|
|
details of the currently selected addresses in the list
|
|
|
|
|
(if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove an Internet address record from
|
|
|
|
|
the database. The button <guibutton>Go</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
allows opening a web-page with the corresponding address
|
|
|
|
|
with your default browser. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, <guibutton>-</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons become available
|
|
|
|
|
only when an address is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>LDS</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - LDS ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-lds-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - LDS</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-lds.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="403"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows LDS Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
about LDS ordinances of the person and controls allowing
|
|
|
|
|
modification. These are <guilabel>LDS
|
|
|
|
|
baptism</guilabel>, <guilabel>Endowment</guilabel>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sealed to parents</guilabel> ordinances, as
|
|
|
|
|
labeled inside the tab. Each ordinance is described by
|
|
|
|
|
its date, LDS temple, and Place where it happened. An
|
|
|
|
|
additional pop-up menu <guilabel>Parents</guilabel> is
|
|
|
|
|
available for the <guilabel>Sealed to parents</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
ordinance. Each ordinance can further be described by
|
|
|
|
|
its status through the selections available in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Status</guilabel> pop-up menu and can also be
|
|
|
|
|
referenced by sources and notes via corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-dates">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Dates</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
This section describes the details of entering and modifying
|
|
|
|
|
dates. Dates are important in genealogical research, so &app;
|
|
|
|
|
goes a long way to preserve and use any date information
|
|
|
|
|
available.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-led">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Date types and validity indicators</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
&app; uses color circles to indicate the validity of the
|
|
|
|
|
entered date.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Date LED buttons</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The color circles are also referred to as the LED buttons.
|
|
|
|
|
Clicking on an LED button will invoke the <guilabel>Date
|
|
|
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog described in detail below, see
|
|
|
|
|
<xref linkend="adv-dates-gui"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Green circle means that the date is valid and complete
|
|
|
|
|
regular date (e.g. May 24, 1961). In simple terms, green
|
|
|
|
|
means that the date is uniquely defined up to a day.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Yellow circle means that the date is valid but is not a
|
|
|
|
|
regular date. This could be the date of an alternative
|
|
|
|
|
type: a before date (before May 25, 1962), an after date
|
|
|
|
|
(after May, 1960), an about date (about May 23, 1961), a
|
|
|
|
|
range (between May 1, 1961 and May 31, 1961), or a span
|
|
|
|
|
(from May 1, 1961 to May 31, 1961). It can also be a
|
|
|
|
|
complete single date, but with quality of Estimated or
|
|
|
|
|
Calculated. Finally, it could be a partial date, i.e. a
|
|
|
|
|
regular quality single date missing some portion,
|
|
|
|
|
e.g. May 1961 or 1961.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
While partial dates do not uniquely define the day, they
|
|
|
|
|
allow at least for some type of comparisons between the
|
|
|
|
|
dates.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Red circle means that the date is not recognized as a
|
|
|
|
|
valid date (e.g. "Christmas week of 61", or "the summer
|
|
|
|
|
when I had surgery"). n that case the date will be
|
|
|
|
|
stored as a text string. Therefore, no comparison with
|
|
|
|
|
other dates will be available. It is best to avoid such
|
|
|
|
|
date entries. Same information can be entered as a note
|
|
|
|
|
for the event of interest instead of a date. In the
|
|
|
|
|
example considered, a better things to do is to enter
|
|
|
|
|
December 1961 as a date and "Christmas week of 61" as a
|
|
|
|
|
note.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-parsing">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Acceptable date entries</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
&app; recognizes many formats of exact dates. The numeric
|
|
|
|
|
formats are determined by the default environment &app; is
|
|
|
|
|
running under. Most European countries use DD.MM.YYYY, the
|
|
|
|
|
US commonly uses MM/DD/YYYY, and so on.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Besides exact dates, &app; recognizes many dates that are
|
|
|
|
|
not regular: before, after, about, ranges and spans. It also
|
|
|
|
|
understands the quality: estimated or calculated. Finally,
|
|
|
|
|
it supports partial dates and many alternative calendars.
|
|
|
|
|
Below is the list of date entry rules to allow precise date
|
|
|
|
|
parsing.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Date parsing rules</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The list below is only valid for English. If you are using
|
|
|
|
|
localized version of &app;, your version may or may not
|
|
|
|
|
provide a localized date parser. At the time of this
|
|
|
|
|
writing, localized parsers exist for French, Russian, and
|
|
|
|
|
Spanish languages.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If the localized parser is available for your version,
|
|
|
|
|
chances are that other rules are in effect. If there's no
|
|
|
|
|
manual in your language yet, you may try following your
|
|
|
|
|
instinct and go with the common ways of denoting dates in
|
|
|
|
|
your language. If all else fails, use the <guilabel>Date
|
|
|
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog described below.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Regular single dates can be entered just as you would
|
|
|
|
|
write them in the letter: May 24, 1961 or January 1,
|
|
|
|
|
2004.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Dates that are not regular should start with the
|
|
|
|
|
quality: estimated or calculated, if applicable. Regular
|
|
|
|
|
quality does not need to be specified, as it is the
|
|
|
|
|
default. Example: est. 1961, or calc 2005.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Next should appear the type: before, after, or about.
|
|
|
|
|
Ranges are denoted with "between DATE and DATE" and
|
|
|
|
|
spans use "from DATE to DATE" patterns, where DATE
|
|
|
|
|
stands for a single date.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Examples: est from 2001 to 2003, before June 1975, est
|
|
|
|
|
about 2000, calc between May 1900 and January 1, 1990.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Partial dates are entered simply by omitting unknown
|
|
|
|
|
information: May 1961, 2004.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Alternate calendars are calendars other than Gregorian
|
|
|
|
|
calendar. Currently, &app; supports Hebrew, French
|
|
|
|
|
Republican, Julian, Islamic, and Persian alternate
|
|
|
|
|
calendars. To specify the calendar other than the
|
|
|
|
|
default Gregorian, append the name of the calendar to
|
|
|
|
|
the date string, e.g. "January 9, 1905 (julian)".
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-gui">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Graphical User Interface for entering dates</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
While the above rules provide a quick and easy way for
|
|
|
|
|
entering most common dates, sometimes there is a need to
|
|
|
|
|
either build a complex date or simply check the date using
|
|
|
|
|
graphical user interface. The <guilabel>Date
|
|
|
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog can be invoked by clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
color circle button (also known as the LED button) next to
|
|
|
|
|
the date entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Date selection dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="adv-dates-gui-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Date selection dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/date-selection.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="400" depth="270" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Date selection dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Calendar</guilabel> menu allows the choice of
|
|
|
|
|
any supported calendar. The <guilabel>Quality</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
menu provides choices of Regular, Estimated, or Calculated
|
|
|
|
|
quality. The <guilabel>Type</guilabel> menu allows to adjust
|
|
|
|
|
the exact date type: Regular, Before, After, About, Range,
|
|
|
|
|
Span, and Text only. A set of controls labeled
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Date</guilabel> allows setting the day, the month,
|
|
|
|
|
and the year for a date. The second set of controls,
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Second date</guilabel>, is disabled for all dates
|
|
|
|
|
except for those of Range and Span type. For ranges and
|
|
|
|
|
spans, the <guilabel>Second date</guilabel> controls allow
|
|
|
|
|
setting the details of the second date. Finally, the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Text comment</guilabel> text entry field allows
|
|
|
|
|
storing an arbitrary text string along with the date.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If you enter the date outside this dialog, i.e. as a text
|
|
|
|
|
in any date entry field, that text will be copied and
|
|
|
|
|
stored as the text comment string during parsing of
|
|
|
|
|
entered text.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Therefore, the comment only lives until the next parsing.
|
|
|
|
|
If you have some important text corresponding to the date,
|
|
|
|
|
you are probably better off by saving that text as a Note
|
|
|
|
|
for the corresponding event.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-rel">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Relationship Data</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Editing of relationship data is performed in the following
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Marriage/Relationship Editor</guilabel> dialog which
|
|
|
|
|
appears after double-clicking on the spouse box in the Family
|
|
|
|
|
View. Alternatively, you may invoke this dialog by
|
|
|
|
|
right-clicking into the spouse box and selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Edit relationship</guilabel> item from the context
|
|
|
|
|
menu.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Relationship dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-rel-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-rel.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="258" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the names of the people whose
|
|
|
|
|
relationship is being edited. The main part of the window
|
|
|
|
|
displays seven notebook tabs containing different categories
|
|
|
|
|
of available information. You can bring any tab to the top for
|
|
|
|
|
viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading.
|
|
|
|
|
The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all
|
|
|
|
|
the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
|
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at
|
|
|
|
|
any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
|
|
|
changes. If any of the data in any tab were modified, the
|
|
|
|
|
alert window will appear with the choices of closing the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog without saving changes, canceling the initial cancel
|
|
|
|
|
request, or saving the changes.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
|
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). This version of
|
|
|
|
|
&app; does not have a separate saving function, all changes
|
|
|
|
|
are immediate.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears boldface; if the tab has no data then its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
|
|
|
relationship data:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
the most general information about the relationship: the
|
|
|
|
|
relationship type. The available types (such as
|
|
|
|
|
married, partners, etc.) can be chosen from the
|
|
|
|
|
drop-down <guilabel>Relationship type</guilabel> menu.
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>ID</guilabel> field displays &app; ID
|
|
|
|
|
number which labels this relationship in the
|
|
|
|
|
database. The <guilabel>Last changed</guilabel> label
|
|
|
|
|
shows the last modification time for this relationship.
|
|
|
|
|
Finally, the <guilabel>Information is
|
|
|
|
|
complete</guilabel> check button provides the way to
|
|
|
|
|
mark whether this relationship's record is complete or
|
|
|
|
|
not.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Events</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
about the events relevant to the relationship and the
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing modification. The bottom part displays
|
|
|
|
|
the list of all such events stored in the database. The
|
|
|
|
|
top part shows the details of the currently selected
|
|
|
|
|
event in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to
|
|
|
|
|
correspondingly add, modify, and remove an event record
|
|
|
|
|
from the database. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when an event is selected
|
|
|
|
|
from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Attributes</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about the attributes of the relationship and
|
|
|
|
|
the controls allowing modification. The bottom part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such attributes stored in the
|
|
|
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the
|
|
|
|
|
currently selected attribute in the list (if any). The
|
|
|
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove an attribute record from the
|
|
|
|
|
database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when an attribute is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Notes</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
about the notes concerning the relationship. These could
|
|
|
|
|
be any notes which do not naturally fit into the
|
|
|
|
|
Parameter-Value pairs available to Attributes. To add a
|
|
|
|
|
note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in
|
|
|
|
|
the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about he sources related to the relationship
|
|
|
|
|
and controls allowing its modification. These could be
|
|
|
|
|
any general sources which refer to the relationship but
|
|
|
|
|
do not describe specifically any event. For example,
|
|
|
|
|
Aunt Martha's memoirs may mention that her great
|
|
|
|
|
grandson Paul was married, so the researcher may assume
|
|
|
|
|
that this relationship (between Paul and his wife)
|
|
|
|
|
existed and cite the memoirs as the source for this
|
|
|
|
|
assumption.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Sources documenting specific events such as marriages
|
|
|
|
|
or divorces are better filed in relation to those
|
|
|
|
|
events, under the <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The central part displays the list of all source
|
|
|
|
|
references stored in the database for this
|
|
|
|
|
relationship. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
relationship. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available
|
|
|
|
|
only when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about media objects associated with the
|
|
|
|
|
relationship and the controls allowing modification of
|
|
|
|
|
such. The central part shows the list of all such media
|
|
|
|
|
objects. For media object which are valid image files
|
|
|
|
|
previews of images are displayed. For other objects such
|
|
|
|
|
as audio files, movie files, etc., a generic &app; icon
|
|
|
|
|
is displayed instead. The buttons
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Select</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add a new image, add a reference to an image already
|
|
|
|
|
stored in the database, modify, and remove a media
|
|
|
|
|
object reference to this relationship. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when a media object is
|
|
|
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>LDS</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
about the LDS <guilabel>Sealed to spouse</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
ordinance of the person and the controls allowing
|
|
|
|
|
modification. The data can include date, LDS temple, and
|
|
|
|
|
Place where it happened. The ordinance can further be
|
|
|
|
|
described by its status through the selections available
|
|
|
|
|
in the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> pop-up menu and can
|
|
|
|
|
also be referenced by sources and notes via
|
|
|
|
|
corresponding <guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-src">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Source Data</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To edit source data, switch to the Sources View and select the
|
|
|
|
|
desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that
|
|
|
|
|
entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar to invoke the following <guilabel>Source
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Source Editor dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-src-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Source Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-src.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="450" depth="256" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Source Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the <guilabel>Source
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> title of the dialog. The main part of the
|
|
|
|
|
window displays four notebook tabs containing different
|
|
|
|
|
categories of available information. You can bring any tab to
|
|
|
|
|
the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate
|
|
|
|
|
tab heading. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all
|
|
|
|
|
the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
|
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at
|
|
|
|
|
any time will close the window without applying any changes.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
|
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). This version of
|
|
|
|
|
&app; does not have a separate saving function, all
|
|
|
|
|
changes are immediate.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears boldface; if the tab has no data then its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
|
|
|
source data:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
the most general information about the source: its
|
|
|
|
|
title, author, abbreviated title, and publication
|
|
|
|
|
information. This information can be typed in the
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate text entry fields.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
|
|
|
concerning the source. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
|
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Data</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Data</guilabel> tab displays Key/Value
|
|
|
|
|
pairs that may be associated with the source. These are
|
|
|
|
|
similar to the attributes used for other record
|
|
|
|
|
types. The difference from these Key/Value pairs and the
|
|
|
|
|
attributes is that the attributes may have source
|
|
|
|
|
references and notes, while the Key/Value data may
|
|
|
|
|
not.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The central part shows the list of all Key/Value pairs,
|
|
|
|
|
if any. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add and remove pairs. To modify the text of Key or
|
|
|
|
|
Value, first select the desired entry (may be an empty
|
|
|
|
|
entry when new pair has just been added). Then click
|
|
|
|
|
into either Key or Value cell inside that entry and edit
|
|
|
|
|
the text in place. When you are done, click outside the
|
|
|
|
|
cell to exit editing mode.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about media objects associated with the
|
|
|
|
|
given source and controls allowing its modification. The
|
|
|
|
|
central part shows the list of all such media
|
|
|
|
|
objects. For media object which are valid image files
|
|
|
|
|
previews of images are displayed. For other objects such
|
|
|
|
|
as audio files, movie files, etc., a generic &app; icon
|
|
|
|
|
is displayed instead. The buttons
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Select</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add a new image, add a reference to an image already
|
|
|
|
|
stored in the database, modify, and remove a media
|
|
|
|
|
object reference to this source. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when a media object is
|
|
|
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about database records that refer to this
|
|
|
|
|
source. If the source is not referenced from any
|
|
|
|
|
database record, the tab shows an empty list. If the
|
|
|
|
|
source is referenced from many records, the tab will
|
|
|
|
|
list all of them. The list can be ordered by any of its
|
|
|
|
|
column headers: <guilabel>Type</guilabel>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking on the list
|
|
|
|
|
entry opens up an editor for a corresponding record
|
|
|
|
|
allowing to view or modify the record.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Only primary objects can be shown in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family,
|
|
|
|
|
Event, Place, or Media object. The secondary objects
|
|
|
|
|
such as Names and Attributes, although may refer the
|
|
|
|
|
source, will only show up through their primary
|
|
|
|
|
objects they belong to.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-plc">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Place Data</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To edit place data, switch to the Places View and select the
|
|
|
|
|
desired entry in the list of places. Double-click on that
|
|
|
|
|
entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar to invoke the following <guilabel>Place
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Place Editor dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-plc-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Place Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-plc.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="450" depth="411" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Place Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the <guilabel>Place
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> title of the dialog. The main part of the
|
|
|
|
|
window displays seven notebook tabs containing different
|
|
|
|
|
categories of available information. You can bring any tab to
|
|
|
|
|
the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate
|
|
|
|
|
tab heading. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all
|
|
|
|
|
the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
|
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at
|
|
|
|
|
any time will close the window without applying any changes.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
|
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). This version of
|
|
|
|
|
&app; does not have a separate saving function, all
|
|
|
|
|
changes are immediate.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears boldface; if the tab has no data then its label
|
|
|
|
|
appears regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
|
|
|
place data:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
the most general information about the place: the title
|
|
|
|
|
which labels it in the database, city, church parish,
|
|
|
|
|
county, state, country, longitude, and latitude. This
|
|
|
|
|
information can be typed in the appropriate text entry
|
|
|
|
|
fields.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Other names</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Other names</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information concerning other names by which the place
|
|
|
|
|
might be known and the controls allowing their
|
|
|
|
|
modification. The bottom part displays the list of all
|
|
|
|
|
other names of the place stored in the database. The top
|
|
|
|
|
part shows the details of the currently selected name in
|
|
|
|
|
the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to
|
|
|
|
|
correspondingly add, modify, and remove a name record
|
|
|
|
|
from the database. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when a name is selected
|
|
|
|
|
from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
|
|
|
concerning the place. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
|
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about sources relevant to this place and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such source references stored
|
|
|
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
place. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the
|
|
|
|
|
list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about media objects associated with the
|
|
|
|
|
given place and the controls allowing its
|
|
|
|
|
modification. The central part shows the list of all
|
|
|
|
|
such media objects. For media objects which are valid
|
|
|
|
|
image files previews of images are displayed. For other
|
|
|
|
|
objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., a
|
|
|
|
|
generic &app; icon is displayed instead. The buttons
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Select</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit.</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add a new image, add a reference to an image already
|
|
|
|
|
stored in the database, modify, and remove a media
|
|
|
|
|
object reference to this place. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when a media object is
|
|
|
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Internet</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about Internet addresses relevant to the
|
|
|
|
|
place and controls allowing its modification. The bottom
|
|
|
|
|
part displays the list of all such Internet addresses
|
|
|
|
|
stored in the database. The top part shows the details
|
|
|
|
|
of the currently selected addresses in the list (if
|
|
|
|
|
any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove an Internet address record from
|
|
|
|
|
the database. The button <guibutton>Go</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
allows you to open a web-page with the corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
address with your default browser. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, <guibutton>-</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons become available
|
|
|
|
|
only when an address is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about database records (events or LDS
|
|
|
|
|
ordinances) that refer to this place. If the place is
|
|
|
|
|
not referenced from any database record, the tab shows
|
|
|
|
|
an empty list. If the place is referenced from many
|
|
|
|
|
records, the tab will list all of them. This
|
|
|
|
|
information cannot be modified from the <guilabel>Place
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog. Instead, the corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
database record (e.g. birth event) has to be brought up
|
|
|
|
|
and its place reference edited.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-media">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Media Data</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To edit media data, switch to the Media View and select the
|
|
|
|
|
desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that
|
|
|
|
|
entry or click <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> on the toolbar to
|
|
|
|
|
invoke the following <guilabel>Media Properties
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Media Properties dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-media-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Media Properties Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-media.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="450" depth="286" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Media Properties Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title. Below the title
|
|
|
|
|
is the preview of an object and the summary of its properties
|
|
|
|
|
(ID, path, and object type). The central part of the window
|
|
|
|
|
displays four notebook tabs containing different categories of
|
|
|
|
|
available information. You can bring any tab to the top for
|
|
|
|
|
viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate tab
|
|
|
|
|
heading. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all
|
|
|
|
|
the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
|
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at
|
|
|
|
|
any time will close the window without applying any changes.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
|
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). This version of
|
|
|
|
|
&app; does not have a separate saving function, all changes
|
|
|
|
|
are immediate.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
|
|
|
media object data:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing the
|
|
|
|
|
title which labels this object in the database. The
|
|
|
|
|
title can be typed in the appropriate text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field. The <guilabel>Date</guilabel> field allows
|
|
|
|
|
entering the date by typing, while the LED button beside
|
|
|
|
|
it will invoke a <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
dialog for setting the date graphically.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
&app; no longer has a concept of local media objects.
|
|
|
|
|
Every media object is referred to by its path. The
|
|
|
|
|
users are responsible for keeping track of the object
|
|
|
|
|
files. &app; will only reference and display the
|
|
|
|
|
contents, not manage the files themselves.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Attributes</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about the attributes of the media object and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The bottom part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such attributes stored in the
|
|
|
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the
|
|
|
|
|
currently selected attribute in the list (if any). The
|
|
|
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove an attribute record from the
|
|
|
|
|
database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when an attribute is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Notes</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
|
|
|
about the notes concerning the media object. These could
|
|
|
|
|
be any notes which do not naturally fit into the
|
|
|
|
|
Parameter-Value pairs available to Attributes. To add a
|
|
|
|
|
note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in
|
|
|
|
|
the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about database records that refer to this
|
|
|
|
|
media object. If the object is not referenced from any
|
|
|
|
|
database record, the tab shows an empty list. If the
|
|
|
|
|
object is referenced from many records, the tab will
|
|
|
|
|
list all of them. The list can be ordered by any of its
|
|
|
|
|
column headers: <guilabel>Type</guilabel>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking on the list
|
|
|
|
|
entry opens up an editor for a corresponding record
|
|
|
|
|
allowing to view or modify the record.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Only primary objects can be shown in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family,
|
|
|
|
|
Event, Source, or Place. The secondary objects such
|
|
|
|
|
as Names and Attributes, although able to refer the
|
|
|
|
|
media object, will only show up through their primary
|
|
|
|
|
objects they belong to.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-ev">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Events</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Events are edited through the following <guilabel>Event
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Event Editor dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-ev-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Event Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-ev.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="450" depth="316" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Event Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
|
|
|
|
|
name of the persons whose event is being edited. The central
|
|
|
|
|
part of the window displays four notebook tabs containing
|
|
|
|
|
different categories of available information. You can bring
|
|
|
|
|
any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
|
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
|
|
|
changes.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
|
|
|
the event data:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
the most general information about the event: its type,
|
|
|
|
|
date, place, cause, and description. The type can be
|
|
|
|
|
selected from available types listed in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Event type </guilabel> drop-down menu. The
|
|
|
|
|
rest of the information can be typed in the appropriate
|
|
|
|
|
text entry fields. Check the <guilabel>Private
|
|
|
|
|
record</guilabel> box to mark this event record as
|
|
|
|
|
private. This will give you a chance to omit this event
|
|
|
|
|
from being included in reports, if you choose so among
|
|
|
|
|
the report generation options.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about sources relevant to this event and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such sources references stored
|
|
|
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
event. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
|
|
|
concerning the event. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
|
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Witnesses</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Witnesses</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about witnesses relevant to this event and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such witnesses stored in the
|
|
|
|
|
database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a witness reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
event, see <xref linkend="adv-wit"/>. Note that the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons become available only when a witness reference
|
|
|
|
|
is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-si">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Source Information</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
When adding source references to events, places, etc., the
|
|
|
|
|
following dialog appears:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Source Information dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-si-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Source Information dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-si.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="450" depth="489" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Source Information dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the source information. The bottom part has
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
|
|
|
time will apply all the changes made and close the dialog
|
|
|
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at
|
|
|
|
|
any time will close the window without applying any changes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The source can be selected from available sources listed in
|
|
|
|
|
the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> drop-down menu. If the source
|
|
|
|
|
you are referencing is not present in the database yet, you
|
|
|
|
|
can enter it into the database. To do this, click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>New...</guibutton> button and enter source
|
|
|
|
|
information into the invoked <guilabel>Source
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog. You can also set the details
|
|
|
|
|
specific for this particular reference: confidence,
|
|
|
|
|
volume/file/page, date, text, and comments. Choose the
|
|
|
|
|
confidence level from the <guilabel>Confidence</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
drop-down menu. The rest of the details can be typed in the
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate text entry fields.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Information in this dialog is specific to the particular
|
|
|
|
|
reference. A single source can be referenced many times,
|
|
|
|
|
and all such references will have in common the overall
|
|
|
|
|
source information. This dialog lets you provide
|
|
|
|
|
reference-specific data, such as relevant quotes, comments,
|
|
|
|
|
confidence, page numbers, etc, to further specify and
|
|
|
|
|
document the reference.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-an">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Names</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para> Names are edited through the following
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog: </para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Names Editor dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-an-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Name Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-an.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="400" depth="509" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Name Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
|
|
|
|
|
name of the person whose name is being edited. The central
|
|
|
|
|
part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
|
|
|
|
|
different categories of available information. You can bring
|
|
|
|
|
any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
|
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
|
|
|
changes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
|
|
|
name data:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
general information about the name: given name, family
|
|
|
|
|
name, patronymic (a form of father's name used in some
|
|
|
|
|
languages, e.g. Russian), family prefix, suffix, title,
|
|
|
|
|
and type of the name. The information can be typed in
|
|
|
|
|
the appropriate text entry fields. The family name and
|
|
|
|
|
the type can be also selected from available choices
|
|
|
|
|
listed in the appropriate drop-down menus. </para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para><guilabel>Options</guilabel> allow you to adjust
|
|
|
|
|
specific grouping, sorting, and displaying properties of
|
|
|
|
|
this name, as well as to provide the date corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
to the name. The <guilabel>Grouping</guilabel> field
|
|
|
|
|
provides an alternative grouping node for a given name,
|
|
|
|
|
overriding the default grouping based on the family
|
|
|
|
|
name. This may be necessary with similar family names
|
|
|
|
|
that need to be grouped together -- for example Russian
|
|
|
|
|
names Ivanov and Ivanova are considered the same, but
|
|
|
|
|
difference in gender is reflected in different
|
|
|
|
|
spelling. To enable typing into this field, check the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Override</guilabel> check button. The
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sort as</guilabel> and <guilabel>Display
|
|
|
|
|
as</guilabel> determine the manner in which the name
|
|
|
|
|
appears in the People View and in the reports. The
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Date</guilabel> can provide information on the
|
|
|
|
|
validity of this name -- use spans as necessary. Check
|
|
|
|
|
the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this
|
|
|
|
|
name record as private. This will give you a chance to
|
|
|
|
|
omit this name from being included in reports, if you
|
|
|
|
|
choose so among the report generation options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about sources relevant to this name and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such sources' references stored
|
|
|
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
name. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
|
|
|
concerning the name. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
|
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-at">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Attributes</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para> Attributes are edited through the following
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Attribute Editor</guilabel> dialog: </para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Attribute Editor dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-at-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Attribute Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-at.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="430" depth="248" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Attribute Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
|
|
|
|
|
name of the person whose attribute is being edited. The
|
|
|
|
|
central part of the window displays three notebook tabs
|
|
|
|
|
containing different categories of available information. You
|
|
|
|
|
can bring any tab to the top for viewing or editing by
|
|
|
|
|
clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
|
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
|
|
|
changes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
|
|
|
the attribute data: </para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
the most general information about the attribute: name
|
|
|
|
|
of the attribute and its value. The information can be
|
|
|
|
|
typed in the appropriate text entry fields. The
|
|
|
|
|
attribute name can also be selected from available
|
|
|
|
|
choices (if any) listed in the <guilabel>Attribute
|
|
|
|
|
</guilabel> drop-down menu. Check the <guilabel>Private
|
|
|
|
|
record</guilabel> box to mark this attribute record as
|
|
|
|
|
private. This will give you a chance to omit this
|
|
|
|
|
attribute from being included in the reports, if you
|
|
|
|
|
choose so among the report generation options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about sources relevant to this attribute and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such sources references stored
|
|
|
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
attribute. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
|
|
|
concerning the attribute. To add a note or modify
|
|
|
|
|
existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-12-03 08:26:43 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2003-12-01 19:52:11 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-ad">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Addresses</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para> Addresses are edited through the following
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Address Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Address Editor dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-ad-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Address Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-ad.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="450" depth="376" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Address Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
|
|
|
|
|
name of the person whose address is being edited. The central
|
|
|
|
|
part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
|
|
|
|
|
different categories of available information. You can bring
|
|
|
|
|
any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
|
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
|
|
|
changes.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
|
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
|
|
|
address data:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
|
|
|
the most general information about the address: date,
|
|
|
|
|
street address, city or county, state or province,
|
|
|
|
|
country, the postal code, and the phone number. The
|
|
|
|
|
information can be typed in the appropriate text entry
|
|
|
|
|
fields. Check the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
box to mark this address record as private. This will
|
|
|
|
|
give you a chance to omit this address from being
|
|
|
|
|
included in reports, if you choose so among the report
|
|
|
|
|
generation options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
|
|
|
information about sources relevant to this address and
|
|
|
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
displays the list of all such sources references stored
|
|
|
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
|
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
|
|
|
address. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
|
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
|
|
|
concerning the address. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
|
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
|
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
|
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
|
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
|
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
|
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
|
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
|
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
|
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-wit">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Witnesses</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Witnesses are edited through the following <guilabel>Witness
|
|
|
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Witness Editor dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-wi-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Witness Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-wi.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="450" depth="259" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Witness Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title. The central part
|
|
|
|
|
of the window displays information about the witness. The
|
|
|
|
|
bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all
|
|
|
|
|
the changes made and close the dialog window. Clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time will close
|
|
|
|
|
the window without applying any changes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The witness name can be entered in two ways, depending upon
|
|
|
|
|
whether the witness is a person already stored in the database
|
|
|
|
|
or not (unrelated person).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the person you would like to add as a witness is in fact
|
|
|
|
|
a member of the database, it is better to use the first
|
|
|
|
|
method below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Person from the database</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the person's data are stored in a database, check
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Person is in the database</guilabel> box. Then
|
|
|
|
|
click the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to invoke
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Select Person</guilabel> dialog. Choose the
|
|
|
|
|
person from that dialog and click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. The
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Person</guilabel> text field will display the
|
|
|
|
|
name of the person you selected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Even though the person's name is displayed in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Person</guilabel> field, it is not available
|
|
|
|
|
for direct editing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Unrelated person</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the person is not in the database, make sure that
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Person is in the database</guilabel> box is
|
|
|
|
|
unchecked. Then enter the name or any description of a
|
|
|
|
|
person into the <guilabel>Person</guilabel> text entry
|
|
|
|
|
field. This information is stored as entered, and this
|
|
|
|
|
is the only place it is stored. In other words, there
|
|
|
|
|
is no reference to that person in the entire database
|
|
|
|
|
except for this witness reference. If the person is in
|
|
|
|
|
fact a member of the database, it is advised to use the
|
|
|
|
|
former method.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Comment</guilabel> text area allows you to enter
|
|
|
|
|
any comments concerning the witness. To add a comment or to
|
|
|
|
|
modify existing comments simply edit the text in the text
|
|
|
|
|
area.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-merge">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Merging records</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Sometime several records in the database turn out to be
|
|
|
|
|
describing the same object: same person, same place, or same
|
|
|
|
|
source. It could happen either when the data is entered twice
|
|
|
|
|
by mistake, or when new information reveals that the two
|
|
|
|
|
entries refer to the same person. It can also happen after
|
|
|
|
|
importing GEDCOM obtained from a relative, whose database
|
|
|
|
|
overlaps with your existing data.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Whenever you detect duplicate records, merging them a useful
|
|
|
|
|
way of correcting the situation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To make a merge, exactly two records have to be selected in
|
|
|
|
|
the appropriate view (People View, Sources View, or Places
|
|
|
|
|
View). This is accomplished by selecting one entry and then
|
|
|
|
|
selecting another person while holding down
|
|
|
|
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-people">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Merge People</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are two ways of merging personal records:
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel> and <guilabel>Fast
|
|
|
|
|
Merge</guilabel>, both available from the
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Merging people does not discard any information with
|
|
|
|
|
either method. The decisions you make during the merge
|
|
|
|
|
only affect which data will become primary and which will
|
|
|
|
|
become secondary for the resulting merged record.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When exactly two people are selected, choose
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Compare
|
|
|
|
|
and Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Compare People</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Compare People dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="comp-people-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Compare People dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/comp-people.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="469" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Compare People dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or
|
|
|
|
|
not the selected records should be merged. If you
|
|
|
|
|
decide that the records should not be merged, despite
|
|
|
|
|
similar names, you may click
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog
|
|
|
|
|
without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
|
|
|
|
|
with merging, select the appropriate
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Select</guilabel> radio button to specify
|
|
|
|
|
the record to be used as the source of primary data,
|
|
|
|
|
then click <guibutton>Merge and close</guibutton>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The data from the other record will be kept as
|
|
|
|
|
alternate data. Specifically, all names from the other
|
|
|
|
|
record will become alternate names of the merged
|
|
|
|
|
record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and children of
|
|
|
|
|
the other record will become alternate parents,
|
|
|
|
|
spouses, and children of the merged record, and so on.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Fast Merge</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When exactly two people are selected, choose
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fast
|
|
|
|
|
Merge</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Merge People</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Compare People dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-people-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Merge People dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-people.png"
|
|
|
|
|
format="PNG" width="382" depth="245"
|
|
|
|
|
scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Merge People dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to quickly merge two records,
|
|
|
|
|
specifying the record to be used as the source of
|
|
|
|
|
primary data. The data from the other record will be
|
|
|
|
|
kept as alternate data. Specifically, all names from
|
|
|
|
|
the other record will become alternate names of the
|
|
|
|
|
merged record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and
|
|
|
|
|
children of the other record will become alternate
|
|
|
|
|
parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
|
|
|
|
|
and so on.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you are not certain whether or not you need to
|
|
|
|
|
merge the records, or which record to specify as the
|
|
|
|
|
source of primary data, use <guilabel>Compare and
|
|
|
|
|
Merge</guilabel> method described above..
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-sources">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Merge Sources</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When exactly two sources are selected, choose
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sources</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Merge Sources dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-src-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Merge Sources dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-src.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="224" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Merge Sources dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
|
|
|
|
|
the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
|
|
|
|
|
the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
|
|
|
|
|
you may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
|
|
|
|
|
with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
|
|
|
|
|
the title, author, abbreviated title, publication
|
|
|
|
|
information, and the ID to be used for the merged record,
|
|
|
|
|
then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-places">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Merge Places</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When exactly two places are selected, choose
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
to invoke <guilabel>Select title</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Select title dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-plc-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Merge Places dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-plc.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="400" depth="185" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Select title dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
|
|
|
|
|
the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
|
|
|
|
|
the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
|
|
|
|
|
you may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the
|
|
|
|
|
dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
|
|
|
|
|
with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
|
|
|
|
|
the title of the merged record, or specify
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Other</guilabel> and enter new text, then click
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-nav">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Navigation</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As long as any database is open, &app; is focused on a single
|
|
|
|
|
person usually referred to as an Active person. This allows
|
|
|
|
|
you to view or modify the data concerning this person, his or
|
|
|
|
|
her immediate family, etc. Navigating in the database (i.e.
|
|
|
|
|
moving from person to person) is in fact nothing else but
|
|
|
|
|
changing the Active person. This section describes many
|
|
|
|
|
alternative ways to navigate through the database using both
|
|
|
|
|
the complex and the convenient interfaces &app; provides. All
|
|
|
|
|
these ways eventually accomplish the same thing, but some are
|
|
|
|
|
more convenient than others, depending what you are doing in
|
|
|
|
|
&app; at the moment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-21 09:06:12 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-people">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Using the People View </title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The most intuitive way to select an active person is to use
|
|
|
|
|
the People View (see <xref linkend="people-view"/>). When in
|
|
|
|
|
the People View, just select the name of the desired person
|
|
|
|
|
from the list by clicking that list entry. The person you have
|
|
|
|
|
selected becomes active. The statusbar updates to reflect the
|
|
|
|
|
change of the active person.
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-family">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Using the Family View</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When in the Family View (see <xref linkend="family-view"/>),
|
|
|
|
|
you can easily navigate between the members of the displayed
|
|
|
|
|
family as follows:
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected spouse the active person,
|
|
|
|
|
click the double-arrow button to the right of the active
|
|
|
|
|
person box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse
|
|
|
|
|
box and select <guilabel>Make the selected spouse an
|
|
|
|
|
active person</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected parents the active family
|
|
|
|
|
(thereby making father the active person and mother the
|
|
|
|
|
selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
|
|
|
|
|
right of the active person's parents box. Alternatively,
|
|
|
|
|
right-click into the active person's parents box and
|
|
|
|
|
select <guilabel>Make the selected parents the active
|
|
|
|
|
family</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected spouse's parents the active
|
|
|
|
|
family (thereby making father the active person and mother
|
|
|
|
|
the selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
|
|
|
|
|
right of the spouse's parents box. Alternatively,
|
|
|
|
|
right-click into the spouse's parents box and select
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Make the selected parents the active
|
|
|
|
|
family</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected child the active person,
|
|
|
|
|
click the left-arrow button to the right of the children
|
|
|
|
|
box. Alternatively, right-click into the children box and
|
|
|
|
|
select <guilabel>Make the selected child an active
|
|
|
|
|
person</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition to this, &app; provides an extensive set of
|
|
|
|
|
keyboard navigation options. The detailed reference to the key
|
|
|
|
|
bindings is found in the <xref linkend="append-keybind"/>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-21 09:06:12 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-pedigree">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Using the Pedigree View</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Pedigree View (see <xref linkend="pedigree-view"/>) also
|
|
|
|
|
allows you to move along the family tree. The benefit of this
|
|
|
|
|
method is that you can see more than one generation of the
|
|
|
|
|
family tree. Also, you can jump directly from a great-grandson
|
|
|
|
|
to a great-grandfather without going through the intermediate
|
|
|
|
|
generations.
|
2005-02-19 06:19:49 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Note that after changing the active person in the Pedigree
|
|
|
|
|
View, the display is re-adjusted to show four generations,
|
|
|
|
|
starting from the newly selected Active person. When in the
|
|
|
|
|
Pedigree View, you can easily navigate between the members of
|
|
|
|
|
the displayed family tree as follows:
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
To make any displayed person the active person,
|
|
|
|
|
double-click the line that connects to the left side of
|
|
|
|
|
the corresponding box.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To make a child of the currently active person (if any)
|
|
|
|
|
the active person, click the left arrow button to the left
|
|
|
|
|
of the corresponding box. If there is more than one child,
|
|
|
|
|
the button expands to the menu listing the children to
|
|
|
|
|
choose from.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To move the whole family tree one generation back, click
|
|
|
|
|
on the corresponding right arrow button on the right-hand
|
|
|
|
|
side of the display area. Clicking the upper button will
|
|
|
|
|
move the tree along the paternal line. Clicking the lower
|
|
|
|
|
button will move the tree along the maternal line.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-02-20 04:03:24 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Clicking either of these buttons is completely equivalent
|
|
|
|
|
to double-clicking the lines connecting to the left of the
|
|
|
|
|
corresponding boxes for father and mother.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
2005-02-20 04:03:24 +05:30
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-02-21 09:06:12 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
You can also quickly access any of the spouses, siblings,
|
|
|
|
|
children, or parents of any displayed person. To do this, move
|
|
|
|
|
the mouse over the desired person's box and right-click to
|
|
|
|
|
invoke a context menu. The appropriate menu items will contain
|
|
|
|
|
submenus listing all spouses, siblings, children, and parents
|
|
|
|
|
of the corresponding person.
|
2005-02-20 04:03:24 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Advantages of using right-click menus</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>Direct access to spouse and siblings</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Complete lists of all member of all categories, not only
|
|
|
|
|
the preferred members.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2005-02-21 09:06:12 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-default">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Setting the Home Person</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
One and only one person in the database can be selected as the
|
|
|
|
|
Home person. Once the Home person is selected, moving to that
|
|
|
|
|
person becomes a matter of a single click, regardless of which
|
|
|
|
|
view you are using at the moment.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
To set the Home person, first navigate to that person using
|
|
|
|
|
any method you like. Then choose
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Set Home person</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Once this is done, you can move to the Home person from
|
|
|
|
|
anywhere in the database by simply clicking the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Home</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. You can also
|
|
|
|
|
choose
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
from the menu or select <guilabel>Home</guilabel> item from
|
|
|
|
|
any context menu available on the right click.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-history">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Using history-based tools</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
&app; also features a powerful set of history-based navigation
|
|
|
|
|
tools. These tools are similar to those commonly used in web
|
|
|
|
|
browsers. They include <guilabel>Back</guilabel> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Forward</guilabel> items available from the
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
menu, context menus (available in People, Family, and Pedigree
|
|
|
|
|
views), and the toolbar buttons. They also include the list of
|
|
|
|
|
the recent selections available under the
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
menu that allows you to jump directly to any of the recent
|
|
|
|
|
selections. Finally, right-clicking on the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Back</guibutton> and <guibutton>Forward</guibutton>
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar buttons invokes the popup menu with corresponding
|
|
|
|
|
portion of the history. Select any item from the menu to jump
|
|
|
|
|
directly to it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-bookmk">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Bookmarking People</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Similar to setting the Home person, you can bookmark other
|
|
|
|
|
people from the database to simplify further navigation. To bookmark
|
|
|
|
|
a person, first navigate to that person, then choose
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Add bookmark</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To move to that person from anywhere in the database, choose
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Go to bookmark</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<replaceable>Person's name</replaceable>
|
|
|
|
|
</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can manage your bookmarks by choosing
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Edit bookmarks...</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This opens the following <guilabel>Edit Bookmarks</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
dialog with the list of bookmarks and the controls to modify
|
|
|
|
|
this list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Edit Bookmarks dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-bm-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Edit Bookmarks dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-bm.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="412" depth="376" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Edit Bookmarks dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-find">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Finding records</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To find a record in a database, first switch to the
|
|
|
|
|
appropriate View that provides the list of the desired
|
|
|
|
|
records: People, Sources, Places, or Media. Then start typing
|
|
|
|
|
the name of a person or the title of a Source, Place, or Media
|
|
|
|
|
object that you are looking for, respectively. You may also
|
|
|
|
|
press <keycap>Ctrl+F</keycap> to turn on the search mode, but
|
|
|
|
|
simply staring to type is also enough.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Type-ahead find ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="find-people-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Type-ahead find</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/find-people.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="352" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows type-ahead find. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
As you type, the first record in the list that is compatible
|
|
|
|
|
with your input will be selected.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Finding People</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For more complex people searches you may want to use
|
|
|
|
|
filters. Enable filter controls by choosing
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>,
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
select the desired filter, and click <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.
|
|
|
|
|
For details, see <xref linkend="filters"/>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gen-reports">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Generating Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Reports are the most common form of the output produced by
|
|
|
|
|
genealogical research. The majority of genealogical software
|
|
|
|
|
puts a lot of emphasis on developing nice looking reports. &app;
|
|
|
|
|
is no exception in this regard, offering a choice of a variety
|
|
|
|
|
of reports. &app; can generate reports in a multitude of open
|
|
|
|
|
formats, both text based and graphical. &app; can also produce
|
|
|
|
|
screen based reports that are convenient for viewing a summary
|
|
|
|
|
of your database. Finally, &app; can generate a web site
|
|
|
|
|
suitable for immediate posting on the Internet. All of these are
|
|
|
|
|
almost infinitely flexible. If you wish to modify or extend the
|
|
|
|
|
default format of &app; report, you can design and choose the
|
|
|
|
|
style for each of your reports.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
All reports can be accessed through the menu by choosing
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<replaceable>Report Type</replaceable>
|
|
|
|
|
</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<replaceable>Particular Report</replaceable>
|
|
|
|
|
</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
|
Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
|
|
|
|
|
available reports along with their brief descriptions in a
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Report Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking
|
|
|
|
|
the <guibutton>Reports</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="subst-values">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Substitution Values</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Many of the graphical reports allow you to customize the
|
|
|
|
|
information on the display. Variable substituions are used
|
|
|
|
|
to substitute date for a particular symbol. There are two
|
|
|
|
|
styles of variables. The difference between the two styles
|
|
|
|
|
is how empty data is handled.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
The first style of variables are preceeded by a '$'. If
|
|
|
|
|
the variable evaluates to an empty string, the variable is
|
|
|
|
|
replaced with the empty string. The second style of
|
|
|
|
|
variables are preceeded by a '%'. If the variable evaluates
|
|
|
|
|
to an empty string, the line that contains the variable is
|
|
|
|
|
removed from the output.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$n/%n</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the person's name in the form of FirstName LastName
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$N/%N</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the person's name in the form of LastName, FirstName
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$i/%i</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the GRAMPS ID associated with the person.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$b/%b</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the person's date of birth
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$B/%B</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the person's place of birth
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$d/%d</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the person's date of death
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$D/%D</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the person's place of death
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$s/%s</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
|
|
|
|
|
the form of FirstName LastName
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$S/%S</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
|
|
|
|
|
the form of LastName, FirstName.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$m/%m</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the marriage date of the person and the preferred
|
|
|
|
|
spouse.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>$M/%M</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Displays the place assocated with the marriage of the
|
|
|
|
|
person and the preferred spouse.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-books">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Books</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Currently, the only available report under this category is
|
|
|
|
|
the Book Report.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Book Report creates a single document (i.e. a Book)
|
|
|
|
|
containing a collection of graphical and textual reports.
|
|
|
|
|
Consequently, this allows for a very rich set of documents
|
|
|
|
|
that &app; can produce.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
When Book Report is selected, the following book configuration
|
|
|
|
|
dialog appears:
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Book Report dialog ==== -->
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<figure id="rep-book-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Book Report dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/bookreport.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="510" depth="524" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Book Report dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field is used to
|
|
|
|
|
save the book (a set of configured selections) for future use.
|
|
|
|
|
The top pane lists the items available for inclusion in the
|
|
|
|
|
book. The bottom pane lists the currently selected items in
|
|
|
|
|
the order they will appear in the book.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The horizontal set of buttons by the <guilabel>Book
|
|
|
|
|
name</guilabel> field operates on the whole book. Click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button to clear all items from
|
|
|
|
|
the current book. Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button
|
|
|
|
|
to save the current book (under the name typed in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field) for future
|
|
|
|
|
use.
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Saving the book also saves the configuration for each item.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button to load the book
|
|
|
|
|
from the list of previously saved books. Finally, click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit books</guibutton> button to invoke the
|
|
|
|
|
editable list of available books.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The vertical set of buttons to the right of the bottom pane
|
|
|
|
|
operates on the selected book item. Click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to add selected item from
|
|
|
|
|
the available list to the current book. Click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to remove an item from
|
|
|
|
|
the current book. Use <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Down</guibutton> to change the items order in the
|
|
|
|
|
current book. Click the <guibutton>Setup</guibutton> button to
|
|
|
|
|
configure the options of the selected item of the current
|
|
|
|
|
book.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The configuration dialogs invoked by
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Setup</guibutton> are item-specific. If you choose
|
|
|
|
|
not to configure the item, same defaults will be used for all
|
|
|
|
|
needed options. The common option for almost all book items is
|
|
|
|
|
the center person: the person on whom the item is
|
|
|
|
|
centered. Thanks to this option, you can create a book with
|
|
|
|
|
items centered on different people (e.g. your mom's and dad's
|
|
|
|
|
ancestors as separate chapters). By default, the center person
|
|
|
|
|
is set to the active person.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Almost all items available for inclusion in the book are
|
|
|
|
|
textual or graphical reports, and are therefore available in
|
|
|
|
|
the form of standalone reports. The exception is the following
|
|
|
|
|
items which are only available as book items:
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Title Page</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This item produces a customized Title page. You can
|
|
|
|
|
configure the text of title, subtitle, and the footer of
|
|
|
|
|
the page. An image can be optionally placed between the
|
|
|
|
|
subtitle and the footer. Because of its
|
|
|
|
|
configurability, this item can be used to create title
|
|
|
|
|
pages for the whole book, its chapter, or even a single
|
|
|
|
|
item.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Custom Text</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This item produces a page with three paragraphs, each
|
|
|
|
|
containing custom text. The appearance of the text can
|
|
|
|
|
be adjusted by using custom styles. This item was meant
|
|
|
|
|
to be used for epigraphs, dedications, explanations,
|
|
|
|
|
notes, and so forth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-codegen">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Code Generators</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
This category contains reports that produce code intended to
|
|
|
|
|
be run through the computer, rather than the usual formatted
|
|
|
|
|
output for human reading. The only code generator currently
|
|
|
|
|
available in &app; is the Relationship Graph producing the
|
|
|
|
|
GraphViz description of the graph.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The Relationship Graph creates a complex relationship graph in
|
|
|
|
|
GraphViz format. The GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool can
|
|
|
|
|
transform the graph into postscript, jpeg, png, vrml, svg, and
|
|
|
|
|
other formats. GraphViz tools are freely available from the
|
|
|
|
|
<ulink url="http://www.graphviz.org" type="http">GraphViz
|
|
|
|
|
site</ulink>. Specific options for this report include filter
|
|
|
|
|
and number of generations considered, as well as several
|
|
|
|
|
GraphViz-specific options related to pagination, color, and
|
|
|
|
|
details of the graph.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you are not interested in GraphViz code itself and just
|
|
|
|
|
want to generate graphical output, &app; can do it for you
|
|
|
|
|
under the hood. Look for <guilabel>Relationship
|
|
|
|
|
Graph</guilabel> in the Graphical Reports category, <xref
|
|
|
|
|
linkend="rep-graph"/>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-graph">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Graphical Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Graphical reports represent information in forms of charts and
|
|
|
|
|
graphs. Most of the options are common among graphical
|
|
|
|
|
reports, therefore they will be described only once, at the
|
|
|
|
|
end of this section. The few options which are specific to a
|
|
|
|
|
given report will be described directly in that report's
|
|
|
|
|
entry.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The following graphical reports are currently available in
|
|
|
|
|
&app;:
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Ancestor Chart</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report generates the chart of people who are
|
|
|
|
|
ancestors of the Active person. Specific options include
|
|
|
|
|
the number of generations considered and the format of
|
|
|
|
|
the displayed entries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report is similar to the Ancestor Chart report. It
|
|
|
|
|
provides more options which make it useful for
|
|
|
|
|
generating huge charts suitable for a poster or a wall
|
|
|
|
|
chart. These options include the ability to compress the
|
|
|
|
|
report (getting rid of an empty space) and the option to
|
|
|
|
|
fit the whole chart on to a single page. In the latter
|
|
|
|
|
case, the contents of the chart is scaled down
|
|
|
|
|
appropriately.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Descendant Graph</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report generates a graph of people who are
|
|
|
|
|
descendants of the Active person. Specific options
|
|
|
|
|
include the format of the displayed entries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Fan Chart</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report produces a chart resembling a fan, with Active
|
|
|
|
|
person in the center, parents the the semicircle next to
|
|
|
|
|
it, grandparents in the next semicircle, and so on, for a
|
|
|
|
|
total of five generations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Relationship Graph</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report creates a complex relationship graph in
|
|
|
|
|
GraphViz format and then converts into graphical output
|
|
|
|
|
running it through the the GraphViz
|
|
|
|
|
<command>dot</command> tool behind the scene. Specific
|
|
|
|
|
options for this report include filter, options for
|
|
|
|
|
dates and places for the events, and whether to include
|
|
|
|
|
URLs and IDs for individuals and families. There are
|
|
|
|
|
also several GraphViz-specific options related to
|
|
|
|
|
pagination, color, and details of the graph.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Statistics Chart</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report can collect and display a wealth of
|
|
|
|
|
statistical data about your database. Specific options
|
|
|
|
|
include filter, sorting methods, and additional birth-
|
|
|
|
|
and gender-based limit for inclusion into statistics.
|
|
|
|
|
You can also set the minimum number of items to qualify
|
|
|
|
|
for the bar chart, so that the charts with fewer items
|
|
|
|
|
will generate a pie chart instead. The <guilabel>Chart
|
|
|
|
|
Selection</guilabel> tab allows you to check which
|
|
|
|
|
charts you want to include in your report.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Timeline Graph</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report outputs the list of people with their
|
|
|
|
|
lifetimes represented by intervals on a common
|
|
|
|
|
chronological scale. Specific options include filter,
|
|
|
|
|
sorting method, and the title of the report.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Common options for graphical reports are the filename of the
|
|
|
|
|
output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
|
|
|
|
|
and orientation. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
|
|
|
|
|
opened with the default application.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The options used in reports are persistent: each report
|
|
|
|
|
remembers its options used last time.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-text">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Text Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Text reports represent the desired information as formatted
|
|
|
|
|
text. Most of the options are common among text reports,
|
|
|
|
|
therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this
|
|
|
|
|
section. The options which are specific to a given report will
|
|
|
|
|
be described directly in that report's entry.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The following text reports are currently available in &app;:
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Ahnentafel Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report lists the active person and his or her
|
|
|
|
|
ancestors along with their vital data. The people are
|
|
|
|
|
numbered in a special way which is an established
|
|
|
|
|
standard called Ahnentafel. The active person is given
|
|
|
|
|
number 1. His or her father and mother have numbers 2
|
|
|
|
|
and 3, respectively. This rule holds for every person
|
|
|
|
|
while going back in generations: father's parents are
|
|
|
|
|
numbered 4 and 5, and mother's parents are numbered 6
|
|
|
|
|
and 7, fathers always numbered with even and mothers
|
|
|
|
|
with odd numbers. Therefore, for any person having
|
|
|
|
|
number N in this tree, the numbers of father and mother
|
|
|
|
|
are 2N and 2N+1, respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Complete Individual Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report provides individual summaries similar to
|
|
|
|
|
that of the Individual Summary report. The advantage of
|
|
|
|
|
this report is the specific filter option. Depending on
|
|
|
|
|
the filter choice (active person only, his or her
|
|
|
|
|
descendants, his or her ancestors, or entire database),
|
|
|
|
|
the report may contain from one to many individual
|
|
|
|
|
summaries. Another option for this report is the
|
|
|
|
|
inclusion of source information when listing events.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Comprehensive Ancestors Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report produces a comprehensive description of
|
|
|
|
|
ancestors of the active person. The highlights of this
|
|
|
|
|
report include elaborate layout, images of children,
|
|
|
|
|
present and former spouses, and source
|
|
|
|
|
citations. Specific options: number of backward
|
|
|
|
|
generations to consider, whether to cite sources, and
|
|
|
|
|
whether to break pages between generations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Descendant Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report produces a brief description of descendants
|
|
|
|
|
of the active person. Specific options: number of
|
|
|
|
|
forward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Detailed Ancestral Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report covers in detail the ancestors of the active
|
|
|
|
|
person. It includes vital data (birth and death) as well
|
|
|
|
|
as marriages. Specific options: number of backward
|
|
|
|
|
generations to consider, as well as a variety of options
|
|
|
|
|
regarding the exact contents to include.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Detailed Descendant Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report covers in detail the descendants of the
|
|
|
|
|
active person. It includes vital (birth and death)
|
|
|
|
|
information as well as marriages. Specific options:
|
|
|
|
|
number of forward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>FTM Style Ancestral Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report creates an ancestral report similar to that
|
|
|
|
|
produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
|
|
|
|
|
covers in detail the active person and his/her ancestors
|
|
|
|
|
It includes vital information as well as marriages,
|
|
|
|
|
children, and notes. Specific options: number of
|
|
|
|
|
backward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>FTM Style Descendant Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report creates a descendant report similar to that
|
|
|
|
|
produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
|
|
|
|
|
covers in detail the active person and his/her
|
|
|
|
|
descendants. It includes vital information as well as
|
|
|
|
|
marriages, children, and notes. Specific options: number
|
|
|
|
|
of forward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Family Group Report</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This creates a family group report, showing information
|
|
|
|
|
on a set of parents and their children. Specific
|
|
|
|
|
options: the spouse (available only if the active person
|
|
|
|
|
has more than one spouse).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Individual Summary</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report produces a detailed summary on the active
|
|
|
|
|
person. The report includes all the facts known to the
|
|
|
|
|
database about that person.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Common options for text reports are the filename of the
|
|
|
|
|
output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
|
|
|
|
|
and orientation. For HTML reports, there is no page
|
|
|
|
|
information. Instead, HTML options include the choice of the
|
|
|
|
|
HTML template, either available in &app; or a custom template
|
|
|
|
|
defined by you. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
|
|
|
|
|
opened with the default application.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>The options used in reports are persistent: each report
|
|
|
|
|
remembers its options used last time.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2004-01-20 09:59:41 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-view">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>View Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
View reports are representing overall summaries of the
|
|
|
|
|
database information available immediately for on-screen
|
|
|
|
|
viewing. The following view reports are currently available
|
|
|
|
|
in &app;:
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Number of ancestors</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report displays the number of ancestors of the
|
|
|
|
|
active person.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Summary of the database</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This report displays the overall statistics concerning
|
|
|
|
|
number of individuals of each gender, various incomplete
|
|
|
|
|
entries statistics, as well as family and media
|
|
|
|
|
statistics.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-web">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Web Page</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>The only available report in this category
|
|
|
|
|
is the Narrative Web Site report. It generates a
|
|
|
|
|
web site (that is, a set of linked web pages), for
|
|
|
|
|
a set of selected individuals.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="rep-web-narr">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Narrative Web Site</title>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Introduction</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
&app; 2.0.6 introduced the Narrative Web generator.
|
|
|
|
|
The new tool provides considerably more functionality
|
|
|
|
|
than the older web generator. Instead of using HTML
|
|
|
|
|
templates to customize the pages, CSS style sheets are used.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
More information is now displayed about each person,
|
|
|
|
|
along with information about sources, places, and media
|
|
|
|
|
objects. Introduction pages can be added to provide additional
|
|
|
|
|
information, such as family history.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Selecting the output</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Genealogy records can generate a lot of files. Many web
|
|
|
|
|
servers have a difficult time with many files in a single
|
|
|
|
|
directory. The Narrative Web Generator strives to keep the
|
|
|
|
|
number of files per directory to a managable level. To do
|
|
|
|
|
this, a hierarchy of directores is created. The generated
|
|
|
|
|
files names are not intuitive, but are unique per person.
|
|
|
|
|
Subsequent runs will geneate identical file names, making
|
|
|
|
|
it easy to replace files.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
By default, the output files are written to the specified
|
|
|
|
|
directory. Because of the number of files and directories
|
|
|
|
|
that are created, it may be difficult to transfer the files
|
|
|
|
|
to an external web host. To aid in this, you may directly
|
|
|
|
|
create a gzip'd tar file to more easily upload the data.
|
|
|
|
|
This is the format that should be used if you would like
|
|
|
|
|
to take advantage of the free genealogy page hosting at the
|
|
|
|
|
<ulink url="http://family.gramps-project.org"
|
|
|
|
|
type="http">GRAMPS web hosting site</ulink>.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>To select the gzip'd tar file, select the <guilabel>Store
|
|
|
|
|
web pages in .tar.gz archive</guilabel> option.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Applying a filter</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Like the previous web page generator, and most of the other
|
|
|
|
|
&app; reports, you can control what is included in the output
|
|
|
|
|
by choosing a filter. Several default filters are provided for
|
|
|
|
|
you, but you are free to use the Custom Filter Editor tool to
|
|
|
|
|
create your own.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>Any person matching this filter who is not excluded due
|
|
|
|
|
to the privacy rules, will be included in the output. The default
|
|
|
|
|
filter includes all people in the database.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Applying a style sheet</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS provides six built in style sheets for your web page.
|
|
|
|
|
Each of these style sheets produces a unique look for your pages.
|
|
|
|
|
The generated style sheet is named <filename>narrative.css</filename>.
|
|
|
|
|
You may edit this file if you wish to further customize your
|
|
|
|
|
site.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
If you make modifications to your style sheet, you need to be aware
|
|
|
|
|
the regenerating the pages with the same output directory will
|
|
|
|
|
overwrite your changes to this file. To prevent this from happening,
|
|
|
|
|
make sure you choose <guilabel>No style sheet</guilabel> for subsequent
|
|
|
|
|
runs.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Character set encoding</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Because of GRAMPS internationalization ability, the default character
|
|
|
|
|
set for the HTML pages is UTF-8. This provides support for virtually
|
|
|
|
|
all characters.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>The Apache web server is sometimes misconfigured to override
|
|
|
|
|
the character set specified in an HTML page. This causes problems with
|
|
|
|
|
the UTF-8 character set generated by GRAMPS, distorting characters on
|
|
|
|
|
the screen.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>If your web server is misconfigured and you do not have priveledge
|
|
|
|
|
to fix the configururation, you may solve this problem by overriding the
|
|
|
|
|
default character set to match what your web server may be expecting.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Copyright notice</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>International copyright law reserves all rights to your data.
|
|
|
|
|
You own the data, and people must get your permission to use it.
|
|
|
|
|
In genealogy, however, sharing data is a common ideal. It this case, you
|
|
|
|
|
may wish to grant the user more rights.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>While the default for GRAMPS is to place a notice indicating that
|
|
|
|
|
all rights are reserved, we give you the option to place your site under
|
|
|
|
|
one of several of the Create Commons licenses. With a Creative Commons
|
|
|
|
|
license, you grant user's certain permission to use your data without
|
|
|
|
|
requiring them to contact you directly for permission.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>See the <ulink url="http://creativecommons.org/" type="http">Creative
|
|
|
|
|
Commons</ulink> web site for more information.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Controlling page generation</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>Three additional pages can be generated by the web page generator.
|
|
|
|
|
The Home page is a page that will display an image and a whatever text
|
|
|
|
|
you wish. To enable this page, choose a Media Object
|
|
|
|
|
from the <guilabel>Home Media/Note ID</guilabel> menu on the <guilabel>Page
|
|
|
|
|
Generation</guilabel> tab. If the Media Object contains an image, the image
|
|
|
|
|
is displayed at the top of the page. If the Media Object contains a Note,
|
|
|
|
|
the Note's text is used for the text of the page. A second page, the
|
|
|
|
|
Introduction page, works similarly. Just choose the Media Object in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Introduction Media/Note ID</guilabel> menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>If you choose to include a contact page, the researcher information
|
|
|
|
|
stored in the database is displayed, along with the information specified
|
|
|
|
|
in the <guilabel>Publisher contact/Note ID</guilabel> menu. Please use
|
|
|
|
|
this page with caution,
|
|
|
|
|
since you may consider your contact information to be private.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Privacy</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>Privacy of personal information is an important issue on the web
|
|
|
|
|
today. &app; tries to give you control over the information that is presented.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>&app; provides two options to control the privacy of your information.
|
|
|
|
|
If you select the <guilabel>Do not include records marked private</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
option, any data that is marked as private will not be displayed on the
|
|
|
|
|
generated site. If you select <guilabel>Restrict information on living people</guilabel>,
|
|
|
|
|
&app; will attempt to determine which people have the potential of still
|
|
|
|
|
being alive, and will omit these people from the database. Some countries
|
|
|
|
|
have laws that indicate that a certain number of years must pass after
|
|
|
|
|
someone's death before information can be published. The <guilabel>Years
|
|
|
|
|
to restrict from person's death</guilabel> option allows you to specifiy
|
|
|
|
|
how many years a person must be deceased before the information is included.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>Please note that it is your responsibility to double check all
|
|
|
|
|
information in the pages for any privacy information. &app; cannot be held
|
|
|
|
|
responsible for any privacy issues.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Adding custom code your pages</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>If you are not interested in customizing your pages, you may skip
|
|
|
|
|
the section.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>The previous web generator allowed you to customize your pages
|
|
|
|
|
using HTML templates. Your data would be substituted for certain markers
|
|
|
|
|
in the code.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>This method proved to be too cumbersome for most users. The Narrative
|
|
|
|
|
Web Page Generator introduces a simpler mechanism. On the <guilabel>Page
|
|
|
|
|
Generation</guilabel> tab, you may specify text (including HTML code) that
|
|
|
|
|
will be inserted into each page, separately for the header and the
|
|
|
|
|
footer.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>To create this code, you need to create a Media Object marked as an
|
|
|
|
|
internal note. To create this, add a new Media Object in the Media View,
|
|
|
|
|
and select the internal note option. You may then enter your HTML code.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To insert the code from the internal notes into the web pages,
|
|
|
|
|
select the appropriate Media Objects from the <guilabel>HTML user
|
|
|
|
|
header</guilabel> and <guilabel>HTML user footer</guilabel> menus.
|
|
|
|
|
Two div sections will be added to the pages — userheader and userfooter.
|
|
|
|
|
The corresponding HTML code is inserted into the HTML page surrounded by div
|
|
|
|
|
markers. You can customize your style sheet to provide additional formatting
|
|
|
|
|
and positioning information to control these sections.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-tools">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Running Tools</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
&app; tools allow you to perform various types of analysis of
|
|
|
|
|
your genealogical data. Typically, the tools do not produce
|
|
|
|
|
output in form of printouts or files. Instead, they produce
|
|
|
|
|
screen output immediately available for the
|
|
|
|
|
researcher. However, when appropriate, you can save the
|
|
|
|
|
results of running a tool into a file. Tools present one of
|
|
|
|
|
the major strengths of &app; compared to the most genealogical
|
|
|
|
|
software.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The tools can be accessed through the menu by choosing
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<replaceable>Tool Section</replaceable>
|
|
|
|
|
</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<replaceable>Particular Tool</replaceable>
|
|
|
|
|
</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
|
|
|
|
|
available tools along with their brief descriptions in a
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Tool Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking
|
|
|
|
|
the <guibutton>Tools</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-ae">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Analysis and Exploration</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
This section contains tools which analyze and explore the
|
|
|
|
|
database, but do not alter it. The following analysis and exploration
|
|
|
|
|
tools are currently available in &app;:
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Compare individual events</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tool compares events across the selected group of
|
|
|
|
|
people. The people for this comparison are chosen with
|
|
|
|
|
the use of custom filters. The custom filters can be
|
|
|
|
|
created in the Custom Filter Editor (see <xref
|
|
|
|
|
linkend="tools-util-cfe"/>) that can be invoked by
|
|
|
|
|
clicking the <guilabel>Custom Filter Editor</guilabel>
|
|
|
|
|
button. The resulting table produced by this tool can be
|
|
|
|
|
saved as a spreadsheet.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Interactive descendant browser</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tool builds a tree with the active person being the
|
|
|
|
|
root. Children branch from their parents in the usual
|
|
|
|
|
manner. Use this tool for a quick glance of a person's
|
|
|
|
|
descendants.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Double-clicking on tree node will bring up the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog allowing to
|
|
|
|
|
view or modify the personal data.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-db">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Database Processing</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
This section contains tools which may modify your database.
|
|
|
|
|
The tools from this section are used mostly for finding and
|
|
|
|
|
correcting errors in the data. The following database
|
|
|
|
|
processing tools are currently available in &app;:
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The modifications will only be performed upon your explicit
|
|
|
|
|
consent, except for the automatic fixes performed by
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Check and repair database</guilabel> tool.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Check and repair database</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tool checks the database for integrity problems,
|
|
|
|
|
fixing the problems it can. Specifically, the tool is
|
|
|
|
|
checking for:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Broken family links. These are the cases when a
|
|
|
|
|
person's record refers to a family while the
|
|
|
|
|
family's record does not refer to that person, and
|
|
|
|
|
vice versa.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Missing media objects. The missing media object is
|
|
|
|
|
the object whose file is referenced in the database
|
|
|
|
|
but does not exist. This can happen when the file is
|
|
|
|
|
accidentally deleted, renamed, or moved to another
|
|
|
|
|
location.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Empty families. These are the family entries which
|
|
|
|
|
have no reference to any person as their member.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Parent relationship. This checks all families to
|
|
|
|
|
ensure that father and mother are not mixed up. The
|
|
|
|
|
check is also made that parents have different
|
|
|
|
|
gender. If they have common gender then their
|
|
|
|
|
relationship is renamed to "Partners".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Extract information from names</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
|
|
|
|
|
extract titles and nicknames that may be embedded in a
|
|
|
|
|
person's <guilabel>Given name</guilabel> field. If any
|
|
|
|
|
information could be extracted, the candidates for
|
|
|
|
|
fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
|
|
|
|
|
decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Find possible duplicate people</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tool searches the entire database, looking for the
|
|
|
|
|
entries that may represent the same person.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Fix capitalization of family names</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
|
|
|
|
|
fix the capitalization of family names. The aim is to
|
|
|
|
|
have conventional capitalization: capital first letter
|
|
|
|
|
and lower case for the rest of the family name. If
|
|
|
|
|
deviations from this rule are detected, the candidates
|
|
|
|
|
for fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
|
|
|
|
|
decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Rename personal event types</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tool allows all the events of a certain name
|
|
|
|
|
to be renamed to a new name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Reorder &app; IDs</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
This tool reorders the &app; IDs according to the
|
|
|
|
|
defaults of &app;.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-debug">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Debug</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
This section contains debugging tools that are not of general
|
|
|
|
|
interest for many of the users of &app;. If you're not
|
|
|
|
|
interested in debugging or developing &app; you may safely
|
|
|
|
|
skip this section.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Python evaluation window</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Enter expression into the <guilabel>Evaluation
|
|
|
|
|
Window</guilabel>, get the output in <guilabel>Output
|
|
|
|
|
Window</guilabel>. Any errors should end up in the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Error Window</guilabel>.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Reload plugins</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Makes an attempt to reload all plugins.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
This tool is itself a plugin, but it will not reload itself!
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Show uncollected objects</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Provides the window listing all uncollected objects.
|
|
|
|
|
Depending on the system settings, recently abandoned GUI
|
|
|
|
|
objects may still be uncollected.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-util">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Utilities</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
This section contains tools allowing you to perform a simple
|
|
|
|
|
operation on a portion of data. The results can be saved in
|
|
|
|
|
your database, but they will not modify your existing data.
|
|
|
|
|
The following utilities are currently available in &app;:
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-cfe">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Custom Filter Editor</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The Custom Filter Editor builds custom filters that can be
|
|
|
|
|
used to select people included in reports, exports, and
|
|
|
|
|
other tools and utilities. This is in fact a very powerful
|
|
|
|
|
tool in genealogical analysis.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you launch it, the <guilabel>User defined
|
|
|
|
|
filters</guilabel> dialog appears that lists all the filters
|
|
|
|
|
(if any) previously defined by you. Click the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button to define a new filter.
|
|
|
|
|
Once you have designed your filters, you can edit, test, and
|
|
|
|
|
delete selected filters using the
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Edit...</guibutton>,
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Test...</guibutton>, and
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> buttons, respectively. All the
|
|
|
|
|
filters displayed in the list will be automatically saved
|
|
|
|
|
along with your database and will be available with
|
|
|
|
|
subsequent sessions of &app;.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
The changes made to the filters only take effect when you
|
|
|
|
|
click the <guibutton>Apply and close</guibutton> button.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the
|
|
|
|
|
following <guilabel>Define filter</guilabel> dialog:
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Define filter dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="cfe-df-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Define filter dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/cfe-df.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="400" depth="410" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Define filter dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Type the name for your new filter into the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. Enter any comment that
|
|
|
|
|
would help you identify this filter in the future into the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Comment</guilabel> field. Add as many rules to the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Rule list</guilabel> as you would like to your
|
|
|
|
|
filter using <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button. If the
|
|
|
|
|
filter has more than one rule, select one of the
|
|
|
|
|
<guilabel>Rule operations</guilabel>. This allows you to
|
|
|
|
|
choose whether all rules must apply, only one (either) rule
|
|
|
|
|
must apply, or exactly one (either) rule must apply, in
|
|
|
|
|
order for the filter to generate a match. If your filter has
|
|
|
|
|
only one rule, this selection has no effect.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Check <guilabel>Return values that do not match the filter
|
|
|
|
|
rules</guilabel> to invert the filter rule. For example,
|
|
|
|
|
inverting "has a common ancestor with I1" rule will match
|
|
|
|
|
everyone who does not have a common ancestor with that
|
|
|
|
|
person).
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes
|
|
|
|
|
the following <guilabel>Add Rule</guilabel> dialog:
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Add Rule dialog ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="cfe-ar-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Add Rule dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/cfe-ar.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="297" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Add Rule dialog. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pane on the left-hand side displays available filter
|
|
|
|
|
rules arranged by their categories in an expandable
|
|
|
|
|
tree. For detailed filter rule reference, see <xref
|
|
|
|
|
linkend="append-filtref"/>. Click on the arrows to
|
|
|
|
|
fold/unfold the appropriate category. Select the rule from
|
|
|
|
|
the tree by clicking on its name. The right-hand side
|
|
|
|
|
displays the name, the description, and the values for the
|
|
|
|
|
currently selected rule. Once you are satisfied with your
|
|
|
|
|
rule selection and its values, click
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add this rule to the rule list
|
|
|
|
|
of the currently edited filter. Clicking
|
|
|
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> will abort adding the rule to
|
|
|
|
|
the filter.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A filter you have already designed may be used as a rule
|
|
|
|
|
for another filter. This gives you nearly infinite
|
|
|
|
|
flexibility in custom-tailoring your selection criteria
|
|
|
|
|
that can be later used in most of the exports, reports,
|
|
|
|
|
and some of the tools (such as comparing individual
|
|
|
|
|
events).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-scratch-pad">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Scratch Pad</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
This tool provides a temporary note pad to store database
|
|
|
|
|
records for easy reuse. In short, this is a sort of the
|
|
|
|
|
copy-and-paste functionality extended from textual objects
|
|
|
|
|
to other types of records used in &app;.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
Scratch Pad makes extensive use of drag-and-drop technique.
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
To invoke Scratch Pad, either choose
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Utilities</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Scratch Pad</guimenuitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
or click the <guilabel>ScratchPad</guilabel> button on the
|
|
|
|
|
toolbar. The following window will appear:
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== Figure: Scratch Pad tool ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="scratch-pad-fig">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Scratch Pad tool</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/scratch-pad.png" format="PNG"
|
|
|
|
|
width="500" depth="246" scale="75"/>
|
|
|
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
<phrase>Shows Add Scratch Pad tool. </phrase>
|
|
|
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
|
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Scratch Pad supports addresses, attributes (both personal
|
|
|
|
|
and family), events (both personal and family), names, media
|
|
|
|
|
objects references, source references, URLs, and of course
|
|
|
|
|
textual information of notes and comments. To store any type
|
|
|
|
|
of these records, simply drag the existing record on to the
|
|
|
|
|
Scratch Pad from the corresponding editor dialog. To reuse
|
|
|
|
|
the record, drag it from the Scratch Pad on to the
|
|
|
|
|
corresponding place in the editor, e.g. Address tab,
|
|
|
|
|
Attribute tab, etc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Some objects are showing the link icon on the left. This
|
|
|
|
|
indicates that dragging such selection will produce a
|
|
|
|
|
reference to an existing object, not copy the object
|
|
|
|
|
itself.
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2005-05-11 19:34:47 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
For example, the media object file will not be duplicated.
|
|
|
|
|
Instead, the reference will be made to an existing media
|
|
|
|
|
object, which will result in the local gallery entry.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
Scratch Pad storage is persistent within a single &app;
|
|
|
|
|
session. Closing the window will not lose the stored
|
|
|
|
|
records. However, exiting &app; will.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-other">
|
|
|
|
|
<title>Other tools</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Generate SoundEx codes</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This utility generates SoundEx codes for the names of
|
|
|
|
|
people in the database. Please visit the <ulink
|
|
|
|
|
url="http://www.archives.gov/research_room/genealogy/census/soundex.html"
|
|
|
|
|
type="http">NARA Soundex Indexing page</ulink> to
|
|
|
|
|
learn more about Soundex Indexing System.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Relationship calculator</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This utility calculates and displays the relationship
|
|
|
|
|
of any person to the active person.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
<term>Verify the database</term>
|
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
This utility allows you to verify the database based
|
|
|
|
|
on the set of criteria specified by you.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<title>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Difference between Verify tool and previously
|
|
|
|
|
described Check tool
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</title>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Check tool detects inconsistencies in the
|
|
|
|
|
database structure. The Verify tool, however, is
|
|
|
|
|
detecting the records that do not satisfy your
|
|
|
|
|
particular criteria.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, you may want to make sure that nobody in
|
|
|
|
|
your database had children at the age of 98. Based on
|
|
|
|
|
common sense, such a record would indicate an
|
|
|
|
|
error. However, it is not a consistency error in the
|
|
|
|
|
database. Besides, someone might have a child at the
|
|
|
|
|
age of 98 (although this rarely happens). The Verify
|
|
|
|
|
tool will display everything that violates your
|
|
|
|
|
criteria so that you can check whether the record is
|
|
|
|
|
erroneous or not. The ultimate decision is yours.
|
2003-09-23 06:18:01 +05:30
|
|
|
|
2005-12-06 12:08:09 +05:30
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
2005-02-15 08:05:26 +05:30
|
|
|
</chapter>
|
